Sie sind auf Seite 1von 477

Optical Networks

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM;


General Topics
FT5242EN02GLA01

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics

Legal notice
Intellectual Property Rights
All copyrights and intellectual property rights for Nokia Siemens Networks training documentation, product
documentation and slide presentation material, all of which are forthwith known as Nokia Siemens Networks training
material, are the exclusive property of Nokia Siemens Networks. Nokia Siemens Networks owns the rights to copying,
modification, translation, adaptation or derivatives including any improvements or developments. Nokia Siemens
Networks has the sole right to copy, distribute, amend, modify, develop, license, sublicense, sell, transfer and assign the
Nokia Siemens Networks training material. Individuals can use the Nokia Siemens Networks training material for their
own personal self-development only, those same individuals cannot subsequently pass on that same Intellectual
Property to others without the prior written agreement of Nokia Siemens Networks. The Nokia Siemens Networks
training material cannot be used outside of an agreed Nokia Siemens Networks training session for development of
groups without the prior written agreement of Nokia Siemens Networks.
Indemnity
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and describes only the product defined in the
introduction of this documentation. This document is not an official customer document and Nokia Siemens Networks
does not take responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. This document is intended for the use of Nokia
Siemens Networks customers only for the purposes of the agreement under which the document is submitted. No part of
this documentation may be used, reproduced, modified or transmitted in any form or means without the prior written
permission of Nokia Siemens Networks. The documentation has been prepared to be used by professional and properly
trained personnel, and the customer assumes full responsibility when using it. Nokia Siemens Networks welcomes
customer comments as part of the process of continuous development and improvement of the documentation.
The information or statements given in this documentation concerning the suitability, capacity or performance of the
mentioned hardware or software products are given as is and all liability arising in connection with such hardware or
software products shall be defined conclusively and finally in a separate agreement between Nokia Siemens Networks
and the customer.
IN NO EVENT WILL Nokia Siemens Networks BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS IN THIS DOCUMENTATION OR FOR ANY
DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
OR ANY LOSSES SUCH AS BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,
BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY OR DATA, that might arise from the use of this document or the information in it.
THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
MANDATORY LAW, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS
DOCUMENT. NOKIA SIEMENS NETWORKS RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR
WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE.
This document and the product it describes are considered protected by copyrights and other intellectual property rights
according to the applicable laws.
The wave logo is a trademark of Nokia Siemens Networks Oy. Nokia is a registered trademark of Nokia Corporation.
Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their respective owners, and they are
mentioned for identification purposes only.

FT5242EN02GLA01
Export Control Marks:
N / 5E991
This course is subject to the European Export Control Restrictions.

2009 Nokia Siemens Networks. All rights reserved.


The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of utility model or design,
are reserved.
Technical modifications possible.
Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as they are specifically and expressly agreed upon in a written
contract.

II

FT5242EN02GLA01
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course
introduction
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General
Topics

Sub-sections

Safety instructions

Hardware and functionality

Operating terminal

Operation: Traffic Setup

Protection Features

Maintenance

Abbreviations

Appendix

SURPASS hiT 7080


OAM; General Topics

FT5242EN02GLA01

FT5242EN02GLA01
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

III

10

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics

Warnhinweise
In elektrischen Anlagen stehen zwangslufig bestimmte Teile der Gerte unter Spannung. Einige Teile
knnen auch eine hohe Betriebstemperatur aufweisen.
Eine Nichtbeachtung dieser Situation und der Warnungshinweise kann zu Krperverletzungen und
Sachschden fhren.
Deshalb wird vorausgesetzt, dass nur geschultes und qualifiziertes Personal die Anlagen installiert
und wartet.
Beachten Sie bitte die ntigen Sicherheitsanforderungen und leisten Sie durch ein problembewusstes
Verhalten Ihren Beitrag zur Verhtung von Unfllen jeglicher Art. Gefahren fr Leib und Leben / Leben
und Gesundheit bzw. Verletzungen, die aus sicherheitswidrigem Handeln resultieren knnen, sind von
einer Haftung durch das Nokia Siemens Networks Training Institute ausgeschlossen.

Warnings
High voltages are present in certain parts of this equipment. Some parts can also have high operating
temperatures.
Non-observance of these conditions and the safety instructions can result in personal injury or in
equipment damage.
Therefore only trained and qualified personnel may install and maintain the system.
Please ensure the necessary safety requirements are met and, by demonstrating a responsible
attitude, play your part in avoiding accidents of any kind. Danger to life and limb, life and well being or
injuries that could result from actions adverse to safety are excluded from any liability on the part of
the Nokia Siemens Networks Training Institute.

Atencin
Algunos elementos de este equipo presentan tensiones altas. Incluso algunos componentes pueden
presentar alta temperatura.
No observar estas condiciones y las instrucciones de seguridad puede causar daos personales, as
como daos al equipo.
Por lo tanto el sistema debe ser instalado y mantenido por personal cualificado.
Tenga presente los requerimientos de seguridad y contribuya a la prevencin de accidentes de toda
ndole, actuando consciente de los problemas que pudieran surgir. El ' Nokia Siemens Networks
Training Institute' no se responsabiliza por daos y perjuicios resultantes de actuaciones contrarias a
los aspectos de seguridad y que pongan en peligro la salud y la vida de las personas involucradas.

Attention
Des tensions leves sont inevitablement prsentes des points spcifiques de cet quipement
lectrique. Certains lments peuvent aussi avoir en service des temperatures leves.
La non-observation de ces conditions et des instructions de scurit peut engendrer des dgats
personnelles ou un endomagement du matriel.
Pour ces raisons seulement le personnel form et qualifi est permi dinstaller et de maintenir le
systme.
Veuillez tenir compte des exigences de scurit ncessaires et contribuer la prvention des
accidents de toutes sortes par un comportement conscient des risques. L'Nokia Siemens Networks
Training Institute dcline toute responsabilit pour les dangers menaant le corps et la vie / la vie et la
sant et/ou les blessures pouvant rsulter d'actes contraires la scurit.

IV

FT5242EN02GLA01
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics

Sub-section reference
Sub-section identification
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

FT52421EN02GLA1 Course intro


FT52422EN02GLA1 Safety instruction
FT52423EN02GLA1 HW & functionality
FT52424EN02GLA1 Operating terminal
FT52425EN02GLA1 Operating Traffic Setup
FT52426EN02GLA1 Protection Features
FT52427EN02GLA1 Maintenance
FT52428EN02GLA1 Abbreviations

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

- 44
- 22
- 70
- 56
- 78
- 106
- 62
- 26

This document consists of 464 pages.

FT5242EN02GLA01
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics

Foreword
The training materials that are handed out are meant for training purposes only. The
accompanying document is not a replacement for the official system documentation,
and is not meant for self-study. The official system documentation is the only licensed
reference work for carrying out work in the field. This student file is your own
property.

At the end of the course, your course conductor will give you some course evaluation
sheets. We ask you to fill out these sheets and would be pleased to receive
suggestions for course improvement regarding the carrying out of the courses and
materials used.
We at Nokia Siemens Networks wish you successful training.

Training management

VI

FT5242EN02GLA01
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics

Declaration
I confirm, that the software made available to me during the courses from the Nokia
Siemens Networks Training Institute for training and practice purposes, will not be
further copied outside of the training.
Furthermore I assure that no software will be copied on to the training PCs, without
the explicit consent of the trainer.
With my signature on the attendance list, I confirm that I will adhere to both of the
above requests.

FT5242EN02GLA01
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

VII

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics

VIII

FT5242EN02GLA01
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

Course introduction

Contents
1
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12

Agenda
Course portfolio
SURPASS hiT 7080
SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050
SURPASS hiT 7060(R4.x), 7035, 7025
SURPASS hiT 7060, hiT 7030, hiT 7020
SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050
SURPASS hiT 7500
SURPASS hiT 7300
SURPASS hiT 7500 TransNet
TNMS Core
TNMS-M
Technology training
Further offers

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

3
5
6
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40

Course introduction

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

Agenda

1.Welcome to the Training Institute


2.Prior to the start of the course:
Safety Instructions
3.Course information
4.During the course:
Breaks; Lunch etc.
5.On completion of the course:
Questionnaires; Certificates

Fig. 1

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

Course portfolio

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

2.1

SURPASS hiT 7080

SURPASS hiT 7080 - Standard Training for Service


Aim
The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all OAM
tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents. FT5242 covers
general topics that allow you to perform all daily routine tasks as advised. To get a
deeper understanding and background about these and further tasks the Advanced
Topics courses FT5242, FT5243, FT5244, FT5245, FT5236, FT5247,FT5248 and
FT5249 are designed. Those cover OAM tasks in various fields like SDH, Data
Networking, Synchronization and Commissioning.
For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions
and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises.
You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your
network elements.
Further on a variety of Technology courses will give you a comprehensive
understanding and solid background to carry out your daily work even more
efficiently.

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

FT5242-00S
SURPASS hiT 7080 OM;
General Topics

Core and Advanced


training courses

Duration: 2 days
FT5243-00S
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM;
SDH and Equipment Core
Functionalities Advanced
Topics
Duration: 3 days
OR

FT5249-00S

FT5236-00S

TG7010-01S

TG7010-01S

SURPASS hiT 7080


Installation Commissioning

SURPASS hiT 70 series


OAM; Synchronization
Advanced Topics

Introduction to Data
Networking

Introduction to Data
Networking

Duration: 2 days

Duration: 2 days

Duration: 1 day

Duration: 2 days

TG7011-01S

TG7011-01S

Understanding TCP/IP
Networks

Understanding TCP/IP
Networks

Duration: 3 days

Duration: 3 days

TG7020-01S

FT5247-00S

Hands-On TCP/IP

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM;


ASON/ GMPLS Advanced
Topics

Duration: 2 days

Duration: 4 days

FT5244-00S
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM;
EoS Advanced Topics
Duration: 2 days
FT5248-00S
Technology Training
Core Training
Advanced Training

recommended - but only optional


Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM;


EoS- L2 Switching Advanced
Topics
Duration: 2 days
OR
FT5245-00S
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM;
RPR Advanced Topics
Duration: 2 days

Fig. 2 SURPASS hiT 7080 Core and advanced training courses

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Course introduction

SURPASS hiT 7080 O&M; General Topics (FT5242-00S)


Target Group
Service
Aim
The main objective of this course is to enable the participant to perform selected
general operation and maintenance tasks according to given instructions. To get a
deeper understanding and background about these and further tasks refer to the
respective Advanced Topics courses
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; SDH and Equipment Core Functionalities AT (FT5243)
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; EoS Advanced Topics (FT5244)
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; RPR Advanced Topics (FT5245)
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; GMPLS Advanced Topics (FT5247)
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; EoS L2 Switching Advanced Topics (FT5248)
SURPASS hiT 70 series OAM; Synchronization Advanced Topics (FT5236)
SURPASS hiT 7080 Installation & Commissioning (FT5249)
Training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a
variety of Hands-On exercises.
The participant will be able to perform all daily routine tasks on your network
elements
Prerequisites
Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some
basic knowledge in PDH & SDH is required.
Contents
Safety Instructions
Hardware and Functionality
Introduction to the Equipment
Hardware Design and Functionality
Operating Terminal
General Features
Getting Started: What you need to navigate
Operation
Configuration of SDH/PDH Cards and Ports
Configuration of Cross Connections
Configuration of Path, Line and Card Protection
Maintenance
Alarm Handling
Basic Troubleshooting
Replacement of Cards and Modules

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

Comment
Training is performed on the latest released SW version. Important hint for On-Site
Courses: This course has full d-lab ability (access to remote training lab)!
Duration
2 Days

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; SDH and Equipment Core Functionalities Advanced
Topics (FT5243-00S)
Target Group
Service
Aim
The main objective of this course is to enable the participant to support the network
element in the field. All advanced topics covered are clearly outlined in the contents.
The scope of these topics is beyond the daily routine tasks. Training equipment is
prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On
exercises. All in all you will be able to perform all SDH and Equipment Core
Functionalities relevant service tasks in your network
Prerequisites
Course SURPASS hiT 7080 O&M; General Topics FT5242 or practical OAM
experience on SDH equipment is required
Contents
Safety Instructions
System Overview
Introduction to the Equipment
Hardware Design and Functionality
Operation Terminal: Advanced Topics
Application SW Installation
Administration and NCT Configuration
Operation: Advanced Topics
Ring Protection Configuration Principles
Synchronization
Basic Concept
Configuration of Synchronization Parameters
Performance Management
Basic Concept
Configuration of Performance Parameters
Configuration of TCN and SD Thresholds
MCF Configuration
Introduction to DCN
Configuration of Message Communication Function
Overhead Access

10

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

Maintenance: Advanced Topics


Alarm Configurations
Advanced Troubleshooting
Administration
Access Management
Backup and Restore
Miscellaneous
Comment
Training is performed on the latest released SW version. Important hint for On-Site
Courses: This course has d-lab ability (access to remote training lab; some few
restrictions in practice remain)!
Duration
3 Days

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

11

Course introduction

SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; EoS P2P Advanced Topics (FT5244-00S)


Target Group
Service
Aims
The main objective of this course is to enable the participant to support the network
element in the field. All advanced topics covered are clearly outlined in the contents.
The scope of these topics is beyond the daily routine tasks.
Training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a
variety of Hands-On exercises
All in all the participant will be able to perform all Ethernet over SONET/SDH EoS
relevant service tasks in the network
Prerequisites
Required:
Course SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; SDH and Equipment Core Functionalities
AT (FT5243)
Recommended:
Course IP Technology Introduction to Data Networking (TG7010)
Course Understanding TCP/IP Networks (TG7011)
Course Hands-On TCP/IP (TG7020)
Contents
Technology and Applications
Ethernet
Next Generation SDH
Transport Networks Services Portfolio
Ethernet Multiplexing and Mapping Functions
Configuration Management for transparent p2p connections
Ethernet Card and Port Configuration
Concatenation Configuration
GFP Assignment
Cross Connection Management
LCAS
Fault Management
Performance Management
Ethernet Testing

12

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

Comment
Training is performed on the latest released SW version
Important hint for On-Site Courses: This course has d-lab ability (access to remote
training lab; some few restrictions in practice remain)!
Duration
2 Days

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

13

Course introduction

SURPASS hiT 70 series OAM; Synchronization Advanced Topics (FT5236-00S)


Target Group
Service
Planning Engineers
Aims
The main objective of this course is to enable the participant to support
synchronization issues in the field. All advanced topics covered are clearly outlined in
the contents. The scope of these topics is beyond the daily routine tasks.
Training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a
variety of Hands-On exercises
All in all the participant will be able to perform all Synchronization relevant service
tasks in the network
Prerequisites
Required for Service:
Course SURPASS hiT 7070, 7050 OAM; SDH and Equipment Core
Functionalities Advanced Topics (FT5233)
Required for Planning Engineers:
Course Next Generation Optical Network (FT1102)
Contents
Synchronization, Terms and Definitions

Synchronization Basic Principles


Standards and Recommendations
Demonstration of Jitter
Synchronization Network Architecture

Clock Types
Clock Distribution
Reading the Network Synchronization Plan
Synchronization in SDH Rings

Setting Options of Synchronization Parameters


Synchronization Transfer...

...across SDH/PDH Boundaries


...towards PSTN and PABX
...via ATM networks

14

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

Handling Failures and Reconfigurations

Automatic Reconfiguration
Test Applications
Comment
Important hint for On-Site Courses: This course has d-lab ability (access to remote
training lab; some few restrictions in practice remain)!
Duration
2 Days

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

15

Course introduction

SURPASS hiT 7080; EoS- L2 Switching Advanced Topics (FT5248-00S)


Target Group
Service
Aims
The main objective of this course is to enable the participant to support the network
element in the field. All advanced topics covered are clearly outlined in the contents.
The scope of these topics is beyond the daily routine tasks. Training equipment is
prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On
exercises. All in all the participant will be able to perform all Ethernet over
SONET/SDH EoS relevant service tasks in the network
Prerequisites
Required:
Course SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; EoS AT (FT5244)
Recommended:
Course IP Technology Introduction to Data Networking (TG7010)
Course Understanding TCP/IP Networks (TG7011)
Course Hands-On TCP/IP (TG7020)
Contents
Ethernet Switching: Advanced Topics
Spanning Tree Algorithm
Link Aggregation Group (LAG)
Multicast and IGMP Snooping
VLAN Introduction
How VLANs work
Provider Bridges
Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP)
VLANs and QoS
Configuration Management for mp2mp connections
L2 switch card and port configuration
Concatenation configuration and GFP assignment
LAG
VLAN and QoS
MSTP
Multicast and IGMP Snooping
VLAN Tunneling

16

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

Fault Management
Performance Management
Ethernet Testing
Comment
Training is performed on the latest released SW version. Important hint for On-Site
Courses: This course has d-lab ability (access to remote training lab; some few
restrictions in practice remain)!
Duration
2 Days

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

17

Course introduction

SURPASS hiT 7080 Installation & Commissioning (FT5249-00S)


Target Group
Service
Aims
The main objective of this course is to enable you to check the network element
installation and to commission it according prescribed procedures.
Training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a
variety of Hands-On exercises.
You will be able to commission the SURPASS hiT 7080 equipment.
Prerequisites
Course FT5243 is required. Courses FT5244 is recommended to give a
comprehensive background
Contents
Getting Started
Implementation Overview
Basic Prerequisites
Hardware
Racks and Sub-racks
Service and Operating Interfaces
Commissioning
Preconditions and Preparations
Powering up the System
Configuring the Network Elements
Comment
Training is performed on the latest released SW version.
Duration
1 Day

18

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

19

Course introduction

2.2

SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050

SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050 - Standard Training for Service


Aim
The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all OAM
tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents. FT5232 covers
general topics that allow you to perform all daily routine tasks as advised. To get a
deeper understanding and background about these and further tasks the Advanced
Topics courses FT5233, FT5234, FT5235, FT5236, FT5236, FT5237, FT5238 and
FT5239 are designed. Those cover OAM tasks in various fields like SDH, Data
Networking, Synchronization and Commissioning.
For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions
and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises.
You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your
network elements.
Further on a variety of Technology courses will give you a comprehensive
understanding and solid background to carry out your daily work even more
efficiently.
Target Group
Service
Prerequisites
Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some
basic knowledge in PDH & SDH is required.

20

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

FT5232-00S
SURPASS hiT 7070,7050
OM; General Topics

Core and Advanced


training courses

Duration:3 days
FT5233-00S
SURPASS hiT 7070,7050
OAM; SDH and Equipment Core
Functionalities Advanced
Topics
Duration:3 days
OR

FT5239-00S

FT5236-00S

TG7010-01S

TG7010-01S

SURPASS hiT 7070,7050


Installation Commissioning

SURPASS hiT 70 series


OAM; Synchronization
Advanced Topics

Introduction to Data
Networking

Introduction to Data
Networking

Duration:2 days

Duration: 2 days

TG7011-01S
Understanding TCP/IP
Networks

TG7011-01S
Understanding TCP/IP
Networks

Duration:3 days

Duration: 3 days

Duration:1 day

Duration: 2 days

TG7020-01S

FT5237-00S

Hands-On TCP/IP

SURPASS hiT 7070 OAM;


ASON/ GMPLS Advanced
Topics

Duration:2 days

Duration: 4 days

FT5234-00S
SURPASS hiT 7070,7050
OAM; EoS P2P Advanced
Topics
Duration:2 days
OR
Technology Training
Core Training
Advanced Training

FT5238-00S

recommended - but only optional


Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop

SURPASS hiT 7070,7050


OAM; EoS- L2 Switching
Advanced Topics
Duration: 2 days
OR
FT5235-00S
SURPASS hiT 7070 OAM;
RPR Advanced Topics
Duration: 3 days

Fig. 3 SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050 Core and advanced training courses

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

21

Course introduction

2.3

SURPASS hiT 7060(R4.x), 7035, 7025

SURPASS hiT 7060(R4.x), 7035, 7025 - Standard Training for Service


Aim
The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all OAM
tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents. FT5222 covers
general topics that allow you to perform all daily routine tasks as advised. To get a
deeper understanding and background about these and further tasks the Advanced
Topics courses FT5223, FT5224, FT5225, FT5236, FT5228, and FT5229 are
designed. Those cover OAM tasks in various fields like SDH, Data Networking,
Synchronization and Commissioning.
For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions
and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises.
You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your
network elements.
Further on a variety of Technology courses will give you a comprehensive
understanding and solid background to carry out your daily work even more
efficiently.
Target Group
Service
Prerequisites
Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some
basic knowledge in PDH & SDH is required.

22

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

FT5222-00S
SURPASS hiT 7060
(R4.x),hiT 7035, hiT 7025 OM;
General Topics

Core and Advanced


training courses

Duration: 2 days
FT5223-00S
SURPASS hiT 7060
(R.4x),hiT 7035,hiT 7025 OAM;
SDH and Equipment Core
Functionalities Advanced
Topics
Duration: 3 days
OR

FT5229-00S

FT5236-00S

TG7010-01S

SURPASS hiT 7060


(R4.x), hiT 7035,hiT 7025
Installation Commissioning

SURPASS hiT 70 series


OAM; Synchronisation
Advanced Topics

Introduction to Data
Networking

Duration: 1 day

Duration: 2 days

Duration: 2 days
TG7011-01S
Understanding TCP/IP
Networks
Duration: 3 days
TG7020-01S
Hands-On TCP/IP
Duration: 2 days
FT5224-00S

Technology Training
Core Training
Advanced Training

SURPASS hiT 7060


(R4.x), hiT 7035, hiT 7025 OAM;
EoS P2P Advanced Topics

recommended - but only optional


Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop

Duration: 2 days
FT5228-00S
SURPASS hiT 7060, hiT
7035, hiT 7025 OAM; EoS- L2
Switching Advanced Topics
Duration: 2 days

Fig. 4 SURPASS 7060(R4.x), 7035, 7025 Core and advanced training courses

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

23

Course introduction

2.4

SURPASS hiT 7060, hiT 7030, hiT 7020

SURPASS hiT 7060, 7030, 7020 - Standard Training for Service


Aim
The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all OAM
tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents. FT5212 covers
general topics that allow you to perform all daily routine tasks as advised. To get a
deeper understanding and background about these and further tasks the Advanced
Topics courses FT5213, FT5214, FT5215, FT5236, and FT5219 are designed. Those
cover OAM tasks in various fields like SDH, Data Networking, Synchronization and
Commissioning.
For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions
and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises.
You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your
network elements.
Further on a variety of Technology courses will give you a comprehensive
understanding and solid background to carry out your daily work even more
efficiently.
Target Group
Service
Prerequisites
Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some
basic knowledge in PDH & SDH is required.

24

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

FT5212-00S
SURPASS hiT
7060,7030,7020 OM;
General Topics

Core and Advanced


training courses

Duration: 2 days
FT5213-00S
SURPASS hiT
7060,7030,7020 OAM; SDH and
Equipment Core Functionalities
Advanced Topics
Duration: 3 days
OR

FT5219-00S

FT5236-00S

TG7010-01S

SURPASS hiT
7060,7030,7020 Installation
Commissioning

SURPASS hiT 70 series


OAM; Synchronisation
Advanced Topics

Introduction to Data
Networking

Duration: 1 day

Duration: 2 days

Duration: 2 days
TG7011-01S
Understanding TCP/IP
Networks
Duration: 3 days
TG7020-01S
Hands-On TCP/IP
Duration: 2 days
FT5214-00S

Technology Training
Core Training
Advanced Training

SURPASS hiT
7060,7030,7020 OAM; EoS
Advanced Topics

recommended - but only optional


Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop

Duration: 2 days
OR
FT5215-00S
SURPASS hiT 7060 OAM;
RPR Advanced Topics
Duration: 2 days

Fig. 5 SURPASS hiT 7060, hiT 7030, hiT 7020 Core and advanced training courses

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

25

Course introduction

2.5

SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050

SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050 - Standard Training for Service


Aim
The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all OAM
tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents. FT5232 covers
general topics that allow you to perform all daily routine tasks as advised. To get a
deeper understanding and background about these and further tasks the Advanced
Topics courses FT5233, FT5234, FT5235, FT5236, FT5236, FT5237, FT5238 and
FT5239 are designed. Those cover OAM tasks in various fields like SDH, Data
Networking, Synchronization and Commissioning.
For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions
and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises.
You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your
network elements.
Further on a variety of Technology courses will give you a comprehensive
understanding and solid background to carry out your daily work even more
efficiently.
Target Group
Service
Prerequisites
Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some
basic knowledge in PDH & SDH is required.

26

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

FT5232-00S
SURPASS hiT 7070,7050
OM; General Topics

Core and Advanced


training courses

Duration:3 days
FT5233-00S
SURPASS hiT 7070,7050
OAM; SDH and Equipment Core
Functionalities Advanced
Topics
Duration:3 days
OR

FT5239-00S

FT5236-00S

TG7010-01S

TG7010-01S

SURPASS hiT 7070,7050


Installation Commissioning

SURPASS hiT 70 series


OAM; Synchronization
Advanced Topics

Introduction to Data
Networking

Introduction to Data
Networking

Duration:2 days

Duration: 2 days

TG7011-01S
Understanding TCP/IP
Networks

TG7011-01S
Understanding TCP/IP
Networks

Duration:3 days

Duration: 3 days

Duration:1 day

Duration: 2 days

TG7020-01S

FT5237-00S

Hands-On TCP/IP

SURPASS hiT 7070 OAM;


ASON/ GMPLS Advanced
Topics

Duration:2 days

Duration: 4 days

FT5234-00S
SURPASS hiT 7070,7050
OAM; EoS P2P Advanced
Topics
Duration:2 days
OR
Technology Training
Core Training
Advanced Training

FT5238-00S

recommended - but only optional


Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop

SURPASS hiT 7070,7050


OAM; EoS- L2 Switching
Advanced Topics
Duration: 2 days
OR
FT5235-00S
SURPASS hiT 7070 OAM;
RPR Advanced Topics
Duration: 3 days

Fig. 6 SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050 Core and advanced training courses

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

27

Course introduction

2.6

SURPASS hiT 7500

SURPASS hiT 7500 - Standard Training for Service


Aim
The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all OAM and
Commissioning tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents.
For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions
and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises.
You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your
network elements.
Target Group
Service
Prerequisites
Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some
basic knowledge in SDH and fiber optics is required.

28

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

Core and Advanced


training courses
FT2222-00S
SURPASS hiT 7500 OAM:
General Topics
Duration:5 days
FT2229-00S
SURPASS hiT 7500
Commissioning and Advanced
Topics
Duration:4 days
FT2322-00S
SURPASS hiT 7500;
TransNet Planning Tool
Duration:3 days
Caption
Core Training
Advanced Training

Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop

Fig. 7 SURPASS hiT 7500 Core and advanced training courses

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

29

Course introduction

2.7

SURPASS hiT 7300

SURPASS hiT 7300 - Standard Training for Service


Aims
The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all OAM and
Commissioning tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents.
For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions
and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises.
You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your
network elements.
A variety of offered Technology courses will give you a comprehensive understanding
and solid background to carry out your network studies even more efficiently.
Target Group
Service
Prerequisites
Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some
basic knowledge in SDH and fiber optics is required.

30

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

Core and Advanced


training courses

FT2212-00S
SURPASS hiT 7300 OAM:
General Topics
Duration: 4 days

FT2219-00S
SURPASS hiT 7300
Commissioning and Advanced
Topics
Duration: 3 days

Caption
Core Training
Advanced Training

Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop

Fig. 8 SURPASS hiT 7300 - Core and advanced training courses

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

31

Course introduction

2.8

SURPASS hiT 7500 TransNet

SURPASS hiT 7500 TransNet - Standard Training for Planning


Aims
The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to plan SURPASS hiT
7500 topologies and routes. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course
contents.
For this product course the planning tool is used to perform a variety of Hands-On
exercises.
You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced planning
tasks.
Target Group
Engineering and Planning
Prerequisites
Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some
basic knowledge in SDH and fiber optics is required.

32

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

Core training courses

TG6240-01S
Understanding DWDM
Duration: 5 hours
FT2322-00S
SURPASS hiT 7500;
TransNet Planning Tool
Duration: 3 days
Caption
Core Training

recommended - but only optional


Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop
Web-based Training - Web-based learning
software

Fig. 9 SURPASS hiT 7500 TransNet- Core training courses

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

33

Course introduction

2.9

TNMS Core

Training Option TNMS Core - Standard Training for Service


Aims
The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all important
operation and administration tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual
course contents. FT9212 covers general topics that allow you to perform all daily
routine tasks. For further tasks Advanced Topics courses FT9222, FT9232 and
FT1802 are designed. Those cover operation and administration tasks in various
fields like DWDM and Data Communication Network DCN. Course FT9219 covers
Installation and Commissioning.
For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions
and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises.
You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your
network management system.
Further on a variety of Technology courses will give you a comprehensive
understanding and solid background to carry out your daily work even more
efficiently.
Target Group
Service
Prerequisites
Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some
basic knowledge in PDH & SDH is required.

34

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

Participation on Siemens
network element courses
is recommended to get a
firm background.

Core and Advanced


training courses

OR
Management of pure
SDH networks.

Management of mixed
SDH and DWDM
networks.

Management of pure
DWDM networks.
OR

FT9212-00S

FT9212-00S

FT9222-00S

FT9232

TNMS-Core/CDM
Operation and Administration
for Next Generation SDH
networks

TNMS-Core/CDM
Operation and Administration
for Next Generation SDH
networks

TNMS-Core/CDM
Operation and Administration
for hiT 7300

TNMS
Operation and Administration
for hiT 7500

Duration: 3 days

Duration: 3 days

Duration: 5 days

Duration: 5 days
OR
FT9232

FT9222-00S

TNMS
Operation and Administration
for hiT 7500

TNMS-Core/CDM
Operation and Administration
for hiT 7300

Duration: 1 day

Duration: 1 day

OR
TG7010-01S

FT9219-00S

Introduction to Data
Networking

TNMS-Core Installation
and Commissioning

Duration:2 days

Duration: 2 days

TG7011-01S
Understanding TCP/IP
Networks
Duration:3 days

Caption
Core Training

recommended - but only optional

Advanced Training

Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop

FT1802-00S
DCN in Next Generation
SDH Networks

Technology Training

Duration:4 days

Fig. 10 TNMS Core/CDM - Core and advanced training courses

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

35

Course introduction

2.10

TNMS-M

Training Option TNMS-M - Standard Training for Service


Aims
The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all important
operation and administration tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual
course contents. FT9262 covers general topics that allow you to perform all daily
routine tasks. For further tasks the Advanced Topics course FT1802, is designed.
This covers operation and administration tasks in Data Communication Network
DCN.
For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions
and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises.
You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your
network management system.
Target Group
Service
Prerequisites
Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some
basic knowledge in PDH & SDH is required.
Comment
TNMS-M LCT is not covered in this course sequence; it is part of the network
element training

36

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

Core and Advanced


training courses

FT0108-00S
SURPASS hiT
7060,7030,7020 - Standard
Training for Service
At least one course

FT9262-00S
TNMS-M Operation and
Administration
Duration: 3 days
OR
FT1802-00S
DCN in Next Generation
SDH Networks
Duration: 4 days

Caption
Curriculum, composed of several course
modules
Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop

Prerequisites
Core Training
Advanced Training

Fig. 11 TNMS-M Core and advanced training courses

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

37

Course introduction

2.11

Technology training

Training Option IP Technology Training


Aims
The main objective of the IP Basics Package for everybody is to get an overview
about all technologies and applications used in the IP world. It comprises the
Introduction to Data Networks for the newcomer and gives advanced information in
the wide field of IP level 2 - 4 Switch technologies such as TCP/IP and
Internetworking LAN as well as the WAN technologies ATM and Frame Relay plus
topics of Internetworking WAN/LAN. The benefit of this package is that the
participant has a general understanding of IP including the WAN interfaces. The
advanced training courses will lead the student to deepen specific IP topics in
regard to layer 2, routing protocols, Quality of Service QoS, Security and the WAN
topics ATM and Frame Relay and thus prepares in all aspects for the next
generation network.
Target Group
People from all working areas, who need a comprehensive knowledge of data
networks.
Prerequisites
Basic knowledge of telecommunication

38

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

TG7010-01S
Introduction to Data
Networking
Duration: 2 days
OR
TG7018-01S

TG7019-01S

TG7011-01S

Technology and
Applications of Frame Relay

Technology and
Applications of ATM

Understanding TCP/IP
Networks

Duration: 2 days

Duration: 2 days

Duration: 3 days
OR
TG7020-01S
Hands-On TCP/IP
Duration: 2 days

OR
TG7012-01S
IP Multiservice Networks
Duration: 3 days

OR
OR
TG7013-01S

TG7014-01S

Ethernet: From LAN to


Metro

TCP/IP Advanced

TG7016-01S

TG7015-01S

IP and QoS: IntServ,


DiffServ, MPLS

IT Security in Telco
Networks - Intro

Duration: 3 days

Duration: 1 day

Duration: 3 days

Duration: 3 days

OR

Caption
Prerequisites
Core Training
Advanced Training
Supplementary Training

Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop

TG7021-01S
IT Security Hacking in
Telco Networks - Workshop
Duration: 4 days

Fig. 12 Technology training

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

39

Course introduction

2.12
2.12.1

Further offers
d-lab

What is d-lab?
Distant lab or d-lab is a distant electronic laboratory (set of electronic equipment)
which can be accessed remotely

via Internet or
via ISDN dial-up connection
independently from the location of the equipment
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year

worldwide access possible


For the user d-lab offers the same functionality as a lab next door if the functions of
the equipment can be handled via PC controlled interfaces.
Only real hands-on activities like "insert/change modules" are not possible via remote
access.
Implementation
System/Personnel Requirements
System requirements for using d-lab

i386 compatible workstation PC, Standard PC


Access to the Internet
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher
Java enabled
Cookies enabled
Java runtime environment, at least Version 1.3.1
Port 443 must be allowed on Corporate Firewall

Possibilities
Remote Access

Connect class rooms all over the world to a centralized hardware laboratory
High availability

Round-the-clock shift operation possible


Particularly suitable for

application oriented training


life demos
configuration exercises

40

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

Fig. 13 D-LAB

Customers' Added Value

Only class room PCs with Internet access required


Worldwide access possible
Reduce equipment costs by centralization of hardware
Increase availability of own hardware
Save travel costs
Reduce down-time costs

Success Stories
Carrier
Next Generation Optical Networks

Australia, Germany,
Croatia, Italy

Carrier Next Generation


Switching SURPASS/EWSD

Czech Republic, Thailand,


Germany, Vietnam

Carrier Next Generation


Switching NetManager

Thailand,
Germany

"I was surprised how useful can be the d-laboratory for teaching of topics!"
Course participant feedback

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

41

Course introduction

2.12.2

Synchronous Virtual University

What is SVU?
The Synchronous Virtual University SVU is web-based learning method.
Moderator(s)/Trainer(s) communicate with the participants via the Internet.
SVU allows theoretical presentation and practical presentation with d-lab (see above)
as well. It is specially aimed for realizing short trainings. Those can be a short info
about new products and or features, product training for minor upgrades, technology
etc..
Field of Applications

Training
Collaboration
Announcement
Benefits

Communication via short paths


Flexible locations of instructors
Arbitrary locations of participants
Positive impact on project development due to information flow
PACT impact through cuts in travel costs
Direct contact with the course instructor

Technical Requirements
Standard PC

Sound card
Headset (commercially available)
We recommend 128 kbit/s for your internet access (a lower bandwidth might result
in a poor quality).

Set the screen resolution to 1024 x 768 pixels and 256 colors.
Java needs to be activated in your browser.
By using a PC optiClient, the application needs to be closed. If it is possible,
please activate call forwarding to the voice box during the session.

42

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Course introduction

Moderator

Participant
Internet/
Intranet

Participant

Participant

Moderator
Fig. 14 SVU

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

43

Course introduction

Links to the
Nokia Siemens Networks Training Academy
Internet: https://networks-academy.nokiasiemensnetworks.com/nsninternet/
Intranet: https://networks-academy.inside.nokiasiemensnetworks.com/nsnintranet/

44

FT52421EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Safety instructions

Safety instructions

Contents
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
4
4.1

Protective measures
Protection from high voltages
Protective grounding
Protection from escaping laser light
Handling
Handling of modules with electrostatic sensitive devices
Handling optical fiber connectors and lines
Handling batteries
Notes
Notes on operating the device
Notes on working on the subracks
Weight information
Parts with high operating temperature
PC safety instruction
PC safety

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

3
4
4
6
11
12
13
16
17
18
18
18
18
19
20

Safety instructions

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Safety instructions

Protective measures
Achtung!
Laser und Glasfaser
mechanisch nicht belasten
CAUTION
LASER AND GLASS FIBER
MUST NOT BE
PHYSICALLY DAMAGED
OR STRAINED

V
ESD
R
SE
LA

MAX
EQU IMUM
IP
WT. M EN T
28 K
G

S
AS
CL

oduct
Lase r P r
w
Class 3B
am or vie .
e
b
re into
ta
nts
s
e
t
m
o
u
n
tr
o
s
D
pti cal in
o
h
it
w
cal loop
dire ctly
lose d opti
c
a
in
te
Opera
only.

UNE
QU I
PP

WT.
12 K

ED

Fig. 1

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Safety instructions

Any installation, adjustment, maintenance or repair of the apparatus must only be


carried out by trained, authorized personnel. At all times, personnel must comply with
all safety notices and instructions.
Specific hazards are indicated by symbol labels on or near the affected parts of the
equipment. The labels conform to BS5378, are triangular in shape, and are colored
black on a yellow background. An informative text label may accompany the symbol
label.
Hazard labeling is supplemented by safety notices in the appropriate handbook.
These notices contain additional information on the nature of the hazard and may
also specify precautions. The notices are categorized as either Warnings or Cautions
and are presented in the format shown below.

1.1

Protection from high voltages

When the power supply is involved, VDE 0105 (operation of power installations),
which describes the safety measures required, must be observed.

1.2

Protective grounding

Prior to connecting the external cabling to the system rack, the rack frame must be
grounded. This grounding must remain for as long as cables are connected externally
to the equipment.

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Safety instructions

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Safety instructions

1.3
1.3.1

Protection from escaping laser light


Laser classes

According to the safety provisions all laser products must be assigned to a Class
from 1 to 4 according to their hazard potential, labeled and fitted with the required
protective equipment. Currently two classification schemes, the old one shown in the
graphics and a new one are used simultaneously.
An instruction program, to be repeated annually, is recommended for persons who
use Class 3 A to 4 laser products. Laser safety officers competent in the field only
need to be appointed for Class 3B and 4 laser products, however. Unintentional
radiation emission must be prevented for Class 2 to 4 laser products. Class 2 or 3A
laser products in the service or work area must be clearly recognizable and
permanently labeled. Only qualified and trained employees should be assigned to
install, adjust and operate class 3A to 4 laser equipment.
Use of Class 2 and 3A lasers does not endanger the skin. An eye hazard may be
posed in the visible range of laser radiation if the blink reflex is suppressed and Class
2 or Class 3A laser beams are shone directly into the pupil at close range. In general
there can be an eye hazard if beams emitted from Class 3A lasers are viewed with
collecting optical instruments such as magnifying glasses, telescopes etc.
For the "new" laser classes, the following things have changed:

old class 3A has been split into the new classes 1M and 2M, i.e. these classes are
dangerous when viewed e.g. through a fiberscope.

new is class 3R, as being substantially higher than the 1M (5 times the radiation
power), but much less dangerous than class 3B

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Safety instructions

Fig. 2 Possible laser hazards

Fig. 3 Table of laser classes

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Safety instructions

1.3.2
1.3.2.1

Classes of equipment used


SDH equipment

Synchronous optical fiber systems contain laser equipment. In the case of operation
in a closed system, this equipment meets the safety level of Class 1 laser
equipment.
Devices and modules which carry one
of these signs are fitted with laser
equipment.

LASER CLASS 1

Transmission systems which are fitted with optical laser amplifier modules are assigned to
Danger Class 3A, taking into account foreseeable malfunctions. They are identified by the
following labeling of the amplifier modules:
Laser Klasse 3A Nicht in den Strahl
blicken, auch nicht mit optischen
Instrumenten, Sendebetrieb nur im
geschlossenen optischen System.

Class 3A Laser Product


Do not stare into beam or view directly
with optical instruments. Operate in a
closed optical loop only.

Fig. 4

For safe operation of the whole optical section, activation of the laser safety
shutdown with blocking of the automatic cyclical laser startup is provided. Installation
must be done in a closed system with protection.
To avoid damage to health, the regulations on laser radiation safety (DIN VDE
0837/IEC 825) must be observed.

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Safety instructions

1.3.2.2

DWDM equipment

When operated in a closed system, the laser equipment of the device conforms to
class 1 safety level.
Within the device, hazard level 1M might occur.
Several Modules when open can belong to laser class 3 or even 4.
Labeling of the single modules is done accordingly.
Caution:
So that the Laser Class 1 (or 1M within the device) limits are met, it is not permitted
to carry out any mechanical modifications with the optical (laser) modules. If any
modification of these modules is realized or if the system is not operated according to
the regulations, the operating authorization will expire.
The laser radiation applied is invisible.
Nevertheless, in view of possible malfunctions, laser class 1 (or 1M within the device)
has to be notified. If the automatic laser shutdown APSD is disabled, laser class 3B
has to be notified.
Notwithstanding the above, any optical fiber cable which is open on one side should
be regarded as being in operation.
Never look into the end of a fiber, fiber connector, fiber patchcoard, fiber pigtail or
plug-in module connector until you are SURE that no light is present. Permanent eye
damage or blindness can result if exposed to such optical power levels, even for
extremely short durations. Always use whatever safety devices are supplied (caps,
shutters, etc.). Read and follow all laser warning labels affixed to the device.

Fig. 5 Warning labels on DWDM equipment

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Safety instructions

10

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Safety instructions

Handling

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

11

Safety instructions

2.1

Handling of modules with electrostatic sensitive


devices
All modules contain electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)!

Modules that bear this label have electrostatic sensitive devices, i.e. when handling them
the required safety measures must be configured with.
When modules with the electrostatic sensitive device symbol are packed, unpacked,
touched, extracted or inserted, grounding bracelets must always be worn. This ensures
that the modules are not damaged.
ESD

For this purpose, there are two appropriately marked grounding sockets
on the rack, that accommodate the connecting plug of the grounding
bracelet.

Fig. 6

Every printed circuit board has a grounding outer edge, which is connected to the
ground of the module, by which the board can be held. Touching the component
terminals, the contacts of the SIEDECON plug connector or the conductor tracks
(even if you are grounded correctly) must be avoided.
When modules are removed and inserted while installation and maintenance work is
being carried out, the insertion and extraction aids fitted to them must be used.
Modules which are in a screened, unopened housing are protected in any case.
European Standard EN50082-1 gives guidelines for appropriate handling of electorstatic sensitive devices.
No special rules must be observed when handling sub-racks.
There is danger of injury when the cover of the sub-rack is open. For this reason,
while working on the sub-rack, the sub-rack cover must be lifted in the open state and
then removed.
On completion, this cover must be replaced and closed.

12

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Safety instructions

2.2

Handling optical fiber connectors and lines

Optical connectors are precision parts and must be handled accordingly. Perfect
function is only ensured if the following points are observed:

Optical fiber connectors must always be protected from mechanical damage and
dirt by a protective cap. The dust protection caps should only be removed
immediately before fitting.

After the dust protection caps are removed, the faces of the optical fiber plugs

must be checked for cleanliness and cleaned if necessary. For cleaning, the
optical fiber cleaning tool C52334-A380-A926 or a perfectly clean, lint-free
cellulose cloth or chamois leather can be used. Freon TF, isopropyl alcohol (99%)
or spirit can be used as the cleaning fluid.

Mechanical damage to the faces of optical connectors reduces transmission

quality (increases attenuation), impact stresses must therefore be avoided when


handling the connectors.
Optical fiber lines must never be bent to a radius of less than 30 mm!

Achtung!
Laser und Glasfaser
Follow instructions about mechanical handling of lasers
mechanisch nicht belasten
CAUTION
and optical fibers on the optical modules.
LASER AND GLASS FIBER
MUST NOT BE PHYSICALLY
DAMAGED OR STRAINED

Fig. 7

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

13

Safety instructions

2.2.1

Cleaning of fibers

Once the protective dust caps have been removed or if a fiber connection was
opened, you must check under high magnification the surfaces of the optical fiber
connectors to ensure that they are clean, and clean them if necessary. Also do this
with increased optical attenuation.
The importance of clean fiber ends and connectors cannot be overemphasized.
NEVER make any fiber connection until the mating components are first cleaned, and
cleanliness is verified under magnification. Failure to do so will most likely result in
irreversible damage to fiber and/or connectors, necessitating their replacement.
Burnt-in dust particles also burn the transition area of a clean mating connector
("optical virus"). This is especially important when changing modules.

2.2.2

Fiber endface inspection criteria after cleaning

The fiber ends can be regarded as properly cleaned, when the following criteria are
fulfilled (valid for fibers with a radius of R = 125 m)
1. The 25 m Area (area up to 25 m which also includes the 9 m Core Glass
Area) must not have any visible scratches, impurities, or other damage.
2. In the Cladding Glass Area (R = 25-100 m) at least the inner 50% must be
completely free of scratches, impurities, or other damage. The other 50% must
fulfill the following criteria: They must not have any scratches which are
significantly broader or deeper than 1 m. Impurities of up to 10 m are,
tolerated, however the glass must not be chipped under any circumstances.
3. In the Overclad Area of the fiber (beyond a range of 100 m), isolated rough
scratches, impurities and chipped edges are tolerated up to 15 m.
All impurities must be easily removable.
In the pictures some examples are given for acceptable and unacceptable fiber
endfaces.

14

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Safety instructions

Fig. 8 Fiber endface structure

Fig. 9 Endface examples

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

15

Safety instructions

2.3

Handling batteries

To avoid loss of data, replacement of the battery must be handled by the


manufacturer. Therefore the module (e.g. system controller unit) has to be removed
as described in the MMN manual and sent in a special cover (ESD protection) to the
manufacturer.
The lithium battery on the module must be replaced with an identical type or one
recommended by the manufacturer.
If it is replaced incorrectly, there is danger of explosion.
The lithium battery must be disposed of according to the local regulations for disposal
of special waste.

16

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Safety instructions

Notes

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

17

Safety instructions

3.1

Notes on operating the device

The device must only be operated with the cover closed.

3.2

Notes on working on the subracks

There is danger of injury when the cover of the subrack is open. For this reason,
while working on the subrack, the subrack cover must be lifted in the open state and
then removed. On completion, the subrack cover must be replaced and closed.

3.3

Weight information

MAXIMUM
EQUIPMENT
WT. 23.4 KG

UNEQUIPPED
WT. 13.2 KG

Note the weight data given in subrack label.


Maximum safe lifting weight for one person
= 18 kg.
subrack empty weight = 13.2 kg
subrack full weight = 23.4 kg
The weight shown in kilograms is only
approximate.

Fig. 10

3.4

Parts with high operating temperature


Certain parts (e.g. heat sinks) operate at a high temperature. You
can get injured when touching these parts!
Caution When the subrack cover is opened these parts are
accessible!

Fig. 11

18

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Safety instructions

PC safety instruction

Fig. 12

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

19

Safety instructions

4.1

PC safety

Transport the device only in its original packaging, or equivalent, to protect it from
knocks and jolts.

During installation and before operating the device, observe any instructions on
environmental conditions in the Operating manual of the device.

If the device is brought into the installation site from a cold environment,

condensation can form. Before operating the device, wait until it is absolutely dry
and has reached approximately the same temperature as the installation site.

Ensure that the local line voltage remains within the range of this device. Check

the rated voltage set for this device (see the Operating Manual and type plate of
the device).

The device has a specially approved power cable and must only be connected to a
grounded wall outlet.

Ensure that the power socket on the device or the grounded wall outlet is freely
accessible.

The power switch does not disconnect the device from the line voltage. To

disconnect the line voltage completely, remove the power plug from the grounded
power outlet (see also the Operating Manual of the device).

Connect the device and the attached peripherals to the same circuit.
Lay all cables so that nobody can stand on them or trip over them. Refer to the
relevant notes in the Operating Manual when connecting the device.

No data transmission cable should be connected or disconnected during a


thunderstorm.

Please ensure that no objects or liquids can get into the interior of the device
(electrical shock, short circuit).

In emergency cases (e.g., damaged casing, elements or cables, penetration of


liquids or foreign matter), switch off the device immediately, remove the power
connector and contact your sales office or customer service.

Only qualified technicians may repair the device. Unauthorized repair may
represent a serious hazard to the user (electric shock, fire risk).

Proper operation of the device (in accordance with IEC 950/EN60950) is only

ensured if the casing is completely assembled and the rear covers are in place
(electric shock, cooling, fire protection, interference suppression).

When cleaning the device, observe the relevant notes in the Operating Manual.

20

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Safety instructions

Before opening the device, first switch it off and then disconnect the power plug.

When opening the device observe the instructions in the associated Operating
Manual or Technical Manual. Install only system expansions that satisfy the
requirements and rules governing safety and electromagnetic compatibility and
relationing to telecommunications terminal equipment. If you install other
expansions, you may damage the system or violate the safety regulations and
regulations governing RFI suppression. Information on which system expansions
are suitable can be obtained from the customer service or your sales office. The
components (e.g. power supply) marked with a warning sign (e.g. lightning sign)
may only be opened, removed or exchanged by authorized, qualified personnel.

The warranty is voided if the device is damaged during the installation or


replacement of system expansions.

You may set only those resolutions and refresh rates specified in the "Technical

data" section of the monitor description. Otherwise you may damage your monitor.

Batteries must only be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning


special waste.

Data cables to peripheral devices must be adequately shielded.


WARNING
Incorrect replacement of the device's battery may lead to a risk of explosion.
The battery may be replaced only with an identical battery or with a type
recommended by the manufacturer.

4.1.1

CE certificate

The PC complies with the requirements of the EEC directive 89/336/EEC


Electromagnetic compatibility and 73/23/EEC Low voltage directive with amending
directive 93/67/EEC.

4.1.2

Notes on the laser

The following applies if your PC is equipped with a CD-ROM drive.


The CD-ROM drive contains an LED (light emitting diode) classified according to IEC
825-1:1993: LASER CLASE 1.

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

21

Safety instructions

22

FT52422EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

Hardware and functionality

Contents
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
2
2.1
3
3.1
3.2

Introduction to the equipment


An introduction to the converged network
Transport layers: efficiency of convergence
SURPASS next generation optics
SURPASS multi-service optical networks
What is next generation SDH?
SURPASS hiT 70xx product portfolio overview
Network applications
System manuals
Documentation overview
Hardware design and functionality
Hardware design
Functionality

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

3
4
6
8
10
12
14
26
31
32
35
36
44

Hardware and functionality

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

Introduction to the equipment

Why is
NGDiffServ?
SDH?
What

Fig. 1

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

1.1

An introduction to the converged network

New World of Communications Services


Its a whole new world of communications services, and that world is packet based.
The legacy model, in which voice, video, and data are delivered separately over
dedicated, single purpose networks, no longer meets the needs of 21st century
businesses. Todays businesses require more dynamic services; and they need
versatile computing platforms and real-time, interactive applications to support their
new, business critical needs. As time goes on, it is increasingly clear that the legacy
model is just not up to it.
IP Infrastructure
Instead business needs are being increasingly supported by a next-generation
network that manages diverse traffic types within the context of a converged service
in which voice, data, and video coexist on a single, shared facility.
This converged network supports all of the users traffic types with packet-based
protocols such as ATM, Frame Relay, or IP. Of these, the dominant protocol in the
access, edge, and core of the network is the Internet Protocol (IP). A managed IP
infrastructure for both voice and data transmission is a concept that has begun to
revolutionize the industry. It leverages the Internet so that enhanced services can be
offered at lower costs, and it is motivating the development of a family of dynamic,
next generation, real time applications.
Different Characteristics of Voice and Data Traffic
As most people recognize, voice and data traffic have significantly different
characteristics and are difficult to reconcile within a single network. Data traffic tends
to be bursty, consuming large volumes of bandwidth for occasional, short intervals
whereas voice traffic is predictable and requires a steady, low-delay, transmission
path from end to end.
TIP
Existing Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) circuit-based networks were originally
designed to carry these predictable streams of voice traffic but do not efficiently
support bursty data traffic.

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

Change in Infrastructure
With data growth now outpacing voice, service providers face the challenge of
shedding inefficient TDM infrastructures while preserving the integrity and quality of
private-line and voice traffic. This change is leading to a gradual replacement of the
existing circuit switched infrastructure with new packet-based equipment.
Two additional factors provide an even more compelling need for service providers to
speed up their infrastructure conversion:

Deregulation and competition between incumbent and new service providers


The worldwide explosion in mobile communications

Next Generation Network Architecture


SURPASS
Next Generation
Management

NGN Management

NGN Control
SURPASS
Next Generation
Switching

NGN Control
Media
Gateways

Application/Video Servers

PSTN/
Mobile Network

NGN Core
SURPASS
Next Generation
Optics

IP/Optical
Backbone

NGN Access
Media
Gateway

Triple Play
Voice, Video, Data

Residential Customers

Access
Gateway

Metro
Optics

Multi-Service
Access

CPE
PBX

LAN

SURPASS
Next Generation
Access

Business Customers

Fig. 2 Next Generation Architecture

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

1.2

Transport layers: efficiency of convergence

The transport network need not only be flexible, scalable, and manageable but also
at the same time be open and transparent to the types of client services supported. In
that sense the transport network is a point of convergence for the various type of
services (voice, leased lines, data, and internet) offered by a network operator and
should be transparent to the client service type and flexible to the growth of particular
service types and the traffic mix that may result.
This can only be achieved through a layered network approach where a product with
specific attributes is deployed to specifically address the requirements of the client
services in that domain. A layered structure on of the transport network is a
consequence of the worldwide drive to more efficient networking measured through
cost per switched unit parameter.
Triggered by the universal application and deployment of IP technology, the
traditional border between enterprise and public communications has been blurred
and is slowly disappearing. IP-based applications and the deployment of IP
technology not only established the basis for greater transmission speeds but also
increased the demand for new communication services. Yesterdays focus on
transmission was purely on circuit provisioning with SDH and DWDM. Data world
was based purely on connectionless Ethernet switching and IP routing.
However, the trend in data services, stretching out of the local area into the metro
and regional transmission domain, is changing the requirements for switching and
routing platforms, for example with the introduction of protocols and mechanisms for
traffic separation and circuit orientation (VLAN technology and MPLS). Transmission
networks and systems are therefore also evolving to include mapping of multiple
service and signal types into the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy as well as multipoint
connectivity and statistical multiplexing for enhanced traffic concentration.
As a result, in order to reduce costs for network operators, tomorrows transmission
networks must efficiently manage both types of services provisioned point-to-point
circuits and switched multi-point data services simultaneously in one platform.
Having only one converged network managing both traffic types reduces investment.
This ultimately leads to fewer optical interfaces and, in addition, lowers operational
expenditures.
SURPASS Multi-Service Optical Networks meets the demand of a complete IPoptimized solution for regional and metropolitan areas. Data and Ethernet functions
plus integrated Storage Area Network capabilities are added to the full set of classic
transport features for TDM services. Both the existing and the new services are
managed with one single network and service management system, the TNMS
Telecommunication Network Management System.

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

Transport Layers: Efficiency of Convergence


Data/Internet

Voice

Leased Lines

National / Long Distance Layer


Broadband SDH / DWDM

Key objectives:
Growth & traffic mix

Layered
Transport
Network

Regional / Metropolitan Layer


Broadband SDH / DWDM

Flexibility and scalability


Service differentiation

Switch

Operational Efficiency

Local / Access Layer


Wideband SDH

Fig. 3 Transport Layers: Efficiency of Convergence

SURPASS NG Optics: Customer Benefits


Backbone

Reduced cost of bit/km with a transparent DWDM network

Regional/
Metro Core

Multi-Service Provisioning Platform

Metro
Access/Edge

Up to 40% CAPEX savings due to modular design, multi service


capability (Ethernet, TDM, SAN), high port density
Up to 30% OPEX savings due to plug and play feature, one network
management system, family concept/spare parts reduction, fast
service provisioning
New profitable services for business customers

SAN: Storage Area Networks

POTS, ISDN, xDSL

Mobile

Enterprise ( Data,Voice, SAN)

Other carrier

Fig. 4 Transport Layers: Portfolio Overview

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

1.3

SURPASS next generation optics

The solutions for Next Generation Optics include optical backbone, metro core and
metro edge networks. It guarantees top reliability, multi-service aggregation and longhaul transportation.
Its scalability, intelligent networking functionality and centralized network
management ensures streamlined operations and fast provisioning of customer
specific bandwidth and services.
SURPASS Next Generation Optics include revenue generating multi-service
transport solutions with lowest networking costs:

SURPASS Multi-Service Optical Networks


SURPASS Transparent Optical Networks
SDH and DWDM - complete and future proof network from the edge to the
backbone

Intelligent Switching Platform (Sycamore SN16000)


TNMS - Best-in-class network management for optical networks: MultiVendor and Multi-Technology management;

Enterprise VPN

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

SURPASS Next Generation Optics

Multi-Service
Optical Networks

Transparent
Optical Networks

Telecommunication
Network
Management
System

Fig. 5 SURPASS Next Generation Optics

Summary: Next Generation Optics


TNMS-C

SURPAS S hiT
Trans parent Optical Networks

Backbone/
Regional
SURPASS
hiT 7500/7300

Regional/
Metro Core

Metro
WDM

S URPASS hiT

FSP

Multi Se rv ice
Optic al
Networks

S DH / ne xt-gen. SDH

SL, SMA,
SX

SURPASS hiT
7080/70/60/ HC

ISP
ISP
POP
POP

Metro
Access/Edge

SDH

CPE

next-gen.
S DH

SURPASS hiT
7050/35/30
GbE

SL, SMA,

GbE

Business
Customer

CPE
Enterprise
(storage area netw.)

NAS

SURPASS hiT
7030/25/20/CPE

CPE

Fig. 6 Summary: Next Generation Optics

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

1.4

SURPASS multi-service optical networks

The complete family of SURPASS hiT 70 series Multi-Service Provisioning Platforms


allows building new and extending existing metro and regional transport networks.
With SURPASS hiT 70 series IP-optimized transport networks can be built, with data
and Ethernet functions being added to the classical transport features.
It also is the key to full featured multi-service access for corporate customers.
SURPASS hiT 70 series customer premises equipment (CPE) delivers multiple
services for telephony, Ethernet connectivity e.g. intranet meshing, business video
applications, storage area networking (SAN) and Internet access applications. Such
flexibility is necessary to be able to offer each customer both business class and
economy class types of services. To guarantee the quality of service, SDH
technology is used to securely separate the different traffic streams.
There are a number of compelling reasons why SURPASS Multi-Service Optical
Networks is the perfect answer to the challenges carriers face in the evolution of their
metro and regional platforms:

Multi-Service Provisioning supports both classic leased lines and new, switched
Ethernet services simultaneously on one common minimum-cost platform.

Existing Investment is safeguarded since utilization of the existing network

infrastructure is vastly improved by applying standard technology for IP-optimized


transport solutions without affecting legacy solutions.

Supplying new, profitable services that explicitly meet the growing demands of

corporate customers, increases revenue. Carrier-grade quality of service is


maintained for both existing and new services while building future-proof flexibility
into the network.

Blending transmission and switching technologies in a common minimum-cost

platform, as opposed to pure packet solutions, reduce investment and Operational


Costs.

Plug & Play Commissioning in SURPASS Multi-Service Optical Network solutions,


a comprehensive set of plug & play features, including automatic card detection
and topology discovery, simplifies operations dramatically, thus reducing
operational expenditures.

Operation is optimized with TNMS, the Siemens network management solution


that provides centralized control and supervision of the entire optical network.

10

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

SURPASS Multi Service Optical Networks

Use
Use of
of existing
existing technology
technology and
and installed
installed SDH
SDH base
base
Network
Convergence
with
lowest
OPEX
and
Network Convergence with lowest OPEX and
minimum
minimum additional
additional Capital
Capital Expenditures
Expenditures (CAPEX)
(CAPEX)
One
One Platform
Platform for
for Ethernet,
Ethernet, TDM,
TDM, WDM
WDM and
and SAN
SAN

Next Gen.
SDH

Carrier-grade
Ethernet

Service
transparency

TNMS
Configuration
Tool

Multi-Service
Provisioning
Platform

TNMS

TNMS

Fig. 7 SURPASS Multi Service Optical Networks

SURPASS Multi
Multi Service Optical Networking
Networking
SDH
SD H migrates
migrates to metro/edge
metro/edge
The metro access
access networks consolidate
consolidate Voice, Data, Legacy services,
Leased
Leased lines...
lines...

SDH
SD H evolves to MSPP (Ethernet/TDM/SAN
(Ethernet/T DM/SAN over SDH)
SDH )
Ethernet
Ethernet Layer
Layer 2 functionalities brings an optimal
optimal and intelligent way
way to
transport and handle
handle triple
triple play traffic
traffic over one
one single network
network

Ethernet
/SONET networks
Ethernet over SDH
SDH builds on installed base
base of
of SDH
SDH/SONET
to preserve investment in
in installed base and know-how

Next Gen SDH = Multi - Service Provisioning Platform


Fig. 8 SURPASS Multi Service Optical Networking

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

11

Hardware and functionality

1.5

What is next generation SDH?

What exactly is a Next-Generation SDH solution? A basic definition is:

NG SDH solutions must enable real significant savings in CAPEX and OPEX
compared to legacy SDH.

NG SDH solutions like SURPASS Multi-Service Optical Networks achieve these


improvements by:

Decreasing Footprint
Improving Scalability and Flexibility (Any Size/ Any Service Mix)
Increasing Port Density
Integrated VC-4/VC-12 Switching Fabrics (Switching Cards)
Use of new technologies like Generic Framing procedure (GFP), Virtual

Concatenation and Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) allow for:


- Efficient support of data applications (Ethernet, SAN)
- Offering granularity of bandwidth
- Improved network utilization and efficiency
- Fast/flexible bandwidth and service provisioning capabilities

12

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

What is Next-Generation SDH?


NG SDH solutions must enable real significant savings in
CAPEX and OPEX compared to legacy SDH!
NG SDH Solutions like SURPASS Multi-Service Optical Networks achieve this
improvements by:

Decreasing Footprint
Improving Scalability and Flexibility (Any Size/Any Service Mix)
Increasing Port Density
Integrated VC4/VC12 Switching Fabrics

Use of new technologies like GFP, VC and LCAS which allow for:
Efficient support of data applications (Ethernet, SAN)
Offering granularity of bandwidth
Improved network utilization and efficiency
Fast/flexible bandwidth and service provisioning capabilities

Fig. 9 What is Next Generation SDH?

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

13

Hardware and functionality

1.6

SURPASS hiT 70xx product portfolio overview

SURPASS hiT 70xx NEs are SDH based Multi Service Provisioning Platforms
(MSPP). The product family is reaching from high end multiple ADM64 to MultiService Customer Premises Equipment:

SURPASS hiT 7080


SURPASS hiT 7070
SURPASS hiT 7060 / (HC)
SURPASS hiT 7050
SURPASS hiT 7035
SURPASS hiT 7030
SURPASS hiT 7025
SURPASS hiT 7020
SURPASS certified CPEs

14

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

NG Metro: hiT 70xx Product Portfolio


Portfolio benefits
New

Ne twork a pplication s from CP E to


Metro Core

Ne twork re liability and scalabil ity

TDM servi ces

ASTN/GMPLS functi on ality

hiT 7070

Optimized product fit for every use case


Ethernet se rvices incl. L2
Seamless in terworking with C/DWDM

hiT 7050

hiT 7080

hiT 7025
hiT 7060

New
New

hiT 7030

hiT 7035

hiT 7020
Fig. 10 NG Metro: hiT 70xx Product Portfolio

hiT 7080

HE CC/ADM, multiple STM-64

hiT 7070 SC / DC

ADM / CC, multiple STM-64

hiT 7060 HC

ADM-64, multiple STM-16

hiT 7060

ADM, multiple STM-16

hiT 7050 CC

ADM-16

hiT 7035

ADM-16/-4

hiT 7025

ADM-16/-4/-1

hiT 7050 FP1

ADM-4 modular

hiT 7030

ADM-4/-1 modular

hiT 7020

ADM-4/-1 single board

TNMS Netmanagement

Application

no
redundancy

Product

full
redundancy

NG Metro: hiT 70xx Product Overview

Fig. 11 NG Metro: hiT 70xx Product Overview

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

15

Hardware and functionality

SURPASS hiT 7080


SURPASS hiT7080 is a powerful core network product suitable for being deployed in
metro and regional area with combined SDH, Layer 2 switching, ASON/GMPLS, OTN
and WDM functionalities. It is equipped with a 340G VC-4 switching fabric specifically
targeted for handling large amounts of GE, 10GE, and STM-64 traffic and can
interface directly with DWDM systems. SURPASS hiT 7080 provides 20G (128 x 128
VC-4 equivalents) or 40G (256 x 256 VC-4s equivalents) Low order (VC-3/VC-12
granularity) matrix capability.

SURPASS hiT 7070


This Next Generation Multi-Service Provisioning Platform is a single cost-effective
transport platform that is optimized for both bursty packet and traditional narrowband
and wideband voice traffic. This solution offers the highest degree in flexibility and
scalability (any size for any service mix), quick service provisioning and new revenuerich services. It offers non-blocking 160G@VC-4 and multiple 10G@VC-3/VC-12
switching granularity as well as RPR packet fabric @2G5 and WDM operation.
SURPASS hiT 7070 is operating at the STM-16 and/or STM-64 levels.

16

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

hiT 7080: Executive Feature Summary


Multi Service Platform for PDH, SDH, WDM and Data
Integration

hiT 7080: 340G@VC-4 and 40G@VC-12 / VC-3 Switching


Granularity

Packet fabrics (RPR)

Extended P2P and L2 Ethernet functionalities

Integrated STM-16 DWDM Interfaces for direct


interworking with hiT 7300 and FSP3000

Extensive protection features (HW, SNCP, MSP 1+1/1:N,


2F MS-SPRing, DNI)

GMPLS/ASON based restoration

Extension Shelf solutions (SURPASS hit 7035)

Fig. 12 SURPASS hiT 7080: Executive Feature Summary

hiT 7070: Executive Feature Summary


160 Gb/s HO + 4x 10 Gb/s LO Switching Capacity
TDM Interfaces: 2M/34M/45M/STM-1/-4/-16/-64
Eth/FE/GbE/10GbE @ p2p/p2mp/mp2mp
Transparent Services over WDM
1+1, 1:1, 1:N MSP, SNCP and 2F/4F MS-SPRing
EoS features like VCAT, GFP and LCAS
L2 Service Multiplexer and L2 Switch
GMPLS/ASON based restoration
Integrated @ TNMS Core

Fig. 13 SURPASS hiT 7070: Executive Feature Summary

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

17

Hardware and functionality

SURPASS hiT 7060 HC


This Next Generation Multi-Service Provisioning Platform integrates transport,
access, and switching functions into one powerful and cost effective unit and is
designed for metro aggregation network applications. SURPASS hiT 7060 HC
employs an innovative dual TDM/Data plane design, with large SDH high-order
cross-connect capacity (70G) and substantial low-order cross connect (5G) capacity.
Integrated operation of NE with the extension shelf SURPASS hiT 7035 is supported.
Data L2 services can be provided via L2 switch and/or RPR modules. SURPASS hiT
7060 HC is operating at the STM-16 and/or STM-64 levels.

SURPASS hiT 7060


This Next Generation Multi-Service Provisioning Platform integrates transport, access
and switching functions into one powerful and cost effective unit and is designed for
Metro aggregation network applications.
From de cross connection capacity point of view, there are two variant. For releases
3.x the capacity is 70G for High Order cross connections (VC-4) and 5G for Low
Order cross connections (VC-3 and VC-12). For releases 4.x the cross connection
capacity is 25G for High Order and 10G for Low Order.
VC-4 Matrix

VC-3/-12Matrix

Matrix
70G

70Gbps (448 x 448 VC-4s) non


blocking

5Gbps (2016 x 2016 VC-12s) non


blocking

Matrix
25G

25Gbps (160 x 160 VC-4s) non


blocking

10Gbps (4032 x 4032 VC-12s) non


blocking

Integrated operation of NE with the extension shelf SURPASS hiT 7035 is supported.
Data L2 services can be provided via L2 switch and/or RPR modules. SURPASS hiT
7060 is operating at the STM-16 level.

18

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

hiT 7060 HC: Executive Feature Summary


70 Gb/s HO + 5 Gb/s LO Switching Capacity
within a single switching fabric
TDM Interfaces: 2M/34M/45M/STM-1/-4/-16/-64
Eth/FE/GBE @ p2p/p2mp/mp2mp
L2 switch / aggregation / RPR / ESR
EoS features like VCAT, GFP and LCAS
1+1 MSP, SNCP and 2F MS-SPRing @STM-64/-16/-4
HW protection: controller, matrix, power

Fig. 14 SURPASS hiT 7060 HC: Executive Feature Summary

hiT 7060: Executive Feature Summary


70 Gb/s HO + 5 Gb/s LO Switching Capacity
within a single switching fabric
25 Gb/s HO + 10 Gb/s LO Switching Capacity
including STM-16/STM-4 IF
TDM Interfaces: 2M/34M/45M/STM-1/4/16
1:N Card PDH Card Protection
Layer 2 switching and aggregation/RPR/RSTP
EoS features like VCAT, GFP and LCAS
1+1 MSP, SNCP and 2F MS-SPRing@STM-16
Integrated @ TNMS-M and TNMS Core

Fig. 15 SURPASS hiT 7060: Executive Feature Summary

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

19

Hardware and functionality

SURPASS hiT 7050


SURPASS hiT 7050 is a modular system designed for applications at customer
premises and the metro access layer. The equipment itself is designed to provide a
cost effective and flexible multi-service network node or termination. SURPASS hiT
7050 supports PDH, SDH and Ethernet signals at various bit-rates. The switching
fabric is able to aggregate; groom and cross connect traffic without restrictions, from
VC-4 down to VC-12 level. Furthermore it is even possible to enhance the
functionality by simply plugging a packet switching fabric to the basic configuration.
The following variants exist:

SURPASS hiT 7050 FP1 (FlatPack 1) with a switching capacity of 32 x 32 STM-1


(5G)

SURPASS hiT 7050 CC (CompactCore) with a switching capacity of 64 x 64 STM1 (10G) and enhanced availability

All can be equipped with 2 different trunk port types:


SURPASS hiT 7050 FP1 with STM-1 or STM-4 uplink capacity
SURPASS hiT 7050 CC with STM-4 or STM-16 uplink capacity

SURPASS hiT 7035


SURPASS hiT 7035 in its first release is used as extension shelf for hiT 7060, hiT
7060 HC and hiT 7080 to extend the number of 2 Mbit/s interfaces which can be
supported by one NE. The NE is available also as standalone ADMX.
The SURPASS hiT 7035 can operate using two kinds of matrix cards:
1. CC + one STM-16/-4 card:

High Order Cross-Connection (HOCC): 15 Gbps (98 x 98 VC-4s)


Low Order Cross-Connection (LOCC): 5 Gbps (2016 x 2016 VC-12s)
2. CC + one STM-4/-1 card:

High Order Cross-Connection (HOCC): 7.2 Gbps (46 x 46 VC-4s)


Low Order Cross-Connection (LOCC): 2.5 Gbps (1008 x 1008 VC-12s)

20

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

hiT 7050: Executive Feature Summary


5G and 10G@VC-12 Switching Granularity
MSPP for PDH, SDH and Ethernet Services:
2/34/45Mbps, STM-1/-4/-16, 10/100BaseT, GbE
1:N 2Mbps Card PDH Card Protection
Layer 2 switching and aggregation
EoS features like VCAT, GFP and LCAS
1+1 MSP, SNCP and 2F MS-SPRing@STM-16
Integrated @ TNMS Core

Fig. 16 SURPASS hiT 7050: Executive Feature Summary

hiT 7035: Executive Feature Summary


7.2G HO + 2.5G LO Switching Capacity
including STM-1/STM-4 IF
15G HO + 5G LO Switching Capacity
including STM-4/STM-16 IF
Can be used as Extension Shelf for
hiT 7080/7060HC/7060
ATM-IMA aggregation for mobile networks
Layer 2 switching
EoS features like VCAT, GFP and LCAS
1:N; 1+1 MSP; SNCP; MS-SPRing for STM-4/16 and DNI
Integrated @ TNMS-M and TNMS Core

Fig. 17 SURPASS hiT 7035: Executive Feature Summary

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

21

Hardware and functionality

SURPASS hiT 7030


SURPASS hiT 7030 integrates transport, access and switching into one compact,
efficient platform and is designed to satisfy medium or low capacity metro multiservices access requirements for service provider or private enterprise networks. In
addition to traditional PDH and SDH interfaces, it provides a rich and diversified set
of client data interfaces including L2 switching capabilities. SURPASS hiT 7030 is
operating at the STM-1 or STM-4 levels and has:

SDH high-order cross-connect capacity of 16 x 16 VC-4s (2,5G)


SDH low-order cross connect capacity of 1008 x 1008 VC-12s.
SURPASS hiT 7025
SURPASS hiT 7025 is a compact and integrated STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 system
positioned for Metro Access applications. In addition to traditional PDH and SDH
interfaces, it provides a rich and diversified set of client data interfaces including L2
switching capabilities.
SURPASS hiT 7025 handle two matrix cards. One of them, handle in the faceplate of
the card, one operating at the STM-1 or STM-4 port:

High Order Cross-Connection (HOCC) capacity of 46 x 46 VC-4s (7G)


Low Order Cross-Connection (LOCC) capacity of 1008 x 1008 VC-12s (2,5G).
Alternatively version SURPASS hiT 7025 is also available operating at the STM-4 or
STM-16 levels with:

High Order Cross-Connection (HOCC) capacity of 98 x 98 VC-4s (15 G)


Low Order Cross-Connection (LOCC) capacity of 2016 x 2016 VC-12s (5G)

22

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

hiT 7030: Executive Feature Summary

STM-1 or STM-4 uplink included on mainboard


MSPP for PDH, SDH and Ethernet Services
slim-line chassis 2 HU
Layer 2 switching and aggregation
EoS features like VCAT, GFP and LCAS
1+1 MSP, SNCP and 2F MS-SPRing@STM-4
Integrated @ TNMS-M and TNMS Core

Fig. 18 SURPASS hiT 7030: Executive Feature Summary

hiT 7025: Executive Feature Summary


7 Gb/s HO Switching Capacity and
2,5 Gb/s LO Switching Capacity with STM-1/-4 I/F
15 Gb/s HO Switching Capacity and
5 Gb/s LO Switching Capacity with STM-4/-16 I/F
MSPP for PDH, SDH and Ethernet Services
E1, E3/DS3, STM-1e Card Protection
Layer 2 switching and aggregation
EoS features like VCAT, GFP and LCAS
1+1 MSP, SNCP and 2F MS-SPRing@STM-4/16
Integrated @ TNMS-M and TNMS Core

Fig. 19 SURPASS hiT 7025: Executive Feature Summary

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

23

Hardware and functionality

SURPASS hiT 7020


SURPASS hiT 7020 is a very compact and integrated STM-1/STM-4 system
positioned for Metro Access applications. SURPASS hiT 7020 supports data (FE)
and PDH (E1) traffic. The system can be ordered in various system configurations
(AC or DC power supply, E1 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm) as listed in the table below:
System
Configuration

LOCC (VC-4
equivalent)

SDH Line
Interface

E1 ports

FE ports

A (Rel. 3.1)

44

2 STM-1

B (Rel. 3.1)

44

2 STM-1

4 FE/L2

C (Rel. 3.2)

44

2 STM-1

4 x FE/T

D (Rel. 3.2)

16 16

2 STM-1/4

E (Rel. 3.2)

16 16

2 STM-1/4

4 FE/L2

F (Rel. 3.2)

16 16

2 STM-1/4

4 x FE/T

Table - System Configuration


SURPASS hiT 7020 is designed to satisfy medium or low capacity metro multiservices access requirements for service provider or private enterprise networks.
SURPASS certified CPE's:
SURPASS certified CPE's are cost-optimized, ultra-compact multi-service CPEs with
application specific design that are completing the SURPASS hiT 70xx series.

FSP 1500 Broadband CPE: Broadband CPE equipment for E1, FE, GbE, Fiber

Channel and FICON services with optionally redundant STM-16 or STM-4 Uplink

24

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

hiT 7020: Executive Feature Summary


STM-1 or STM-4 uplink included on mainboard
MSPP for E1 and Ethernet Services
DC Power Supply

slim-line chassis
Optional Layer 2 switching
EoS features like VCAT, GFP and LCAS
1+1 MSP, SNCP and 2F MS-SPRing@STM-4
Integrated @ TNMS-M and TNMS Core

AC Power Supply

Fig. 20 SURPASS hiT 7020: Executive Feature Summary

SURPASS certified CPE Solutions

Ultra
Ultracompact
compactBroadband
BroadbandCPE
CPEfor
for
Ethernet,
SAN
and
TDM
Ethernet, SAN and TDM
SDH
SDHredundant
redundantuplink
uplink(STM-16/-4)
(STM-16/-4)offers
offers
QoS
QoSand
andhighest
highestreliability
reliability
GFP-F
GFP-Fand
andGFP-T
GFP-Tmapping
mappingsupport
support
Use
of
SFP
modules
Use of SFP modulesfor
forall
alloptical
opticalI/F
I/F
Single
Singleboard
boarddesign
design
19
19and
andETSI
ETSIrack
rackmounting
mounting
Desktop
and
wall
mounting option
Desktop
FSP and
1500 wall mounting option
AC
ACand
andDC
DCpowering
poweringoption
option
Integrated
into
Integrated intoTNMS
TNMSCore
Core

Fig. 21 SURPASS certified CPE Solutions

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

25

Hardware and functionality

1.7

Network applications

Terminal Multiplexer (TMX) in terminal-to-terminal topologies


The following figure illustrates a straightforward point-to-point network with one TMX
at the transmitting end and another at the receiving end.
At the TMX, the client equipment is connected to the TMX through the tributary
interfaces (This can be SDH, PDH or GFP based interfaces).

A single VC-4 switching matrix in SURPASS hiT 7080 Network Elements can
add/drop up to a total of 2176 x 2176 VC-4s equivalent at any station.

In addition, a VC-3/-12 switch fabric can also be cascaded with the existing VC-4

switch fabric, if lower order switching granularity is required. This functionality will
be available in the next release.

TIP
The use of MSP between the NE's is preferred for redundancy reasons but not
mandatory.
Add Drop Multiplexer (ADMX) in Linear and Ring Topologies with Add/drop
Function
Linear chains as well as rings are supported by SURPASS hiT 70xx series network
elements in add/drop equipment configuration.
An ADMX is normally used at an intermediate site to add/drop client traffic. In the
figure below, an ADMX is located in between two TMX's. At the ADMX, selected
traffic is add/drop either at VC-4 or VC-3/-12 levels, while through connected traffic is
transparently passed through.
Apart from that, if native Ethernet frame handling is required, then the ADMX can
also be equipped with GFP based traffic interfaces.
TIP
The use of MSP between the NE's is preferred for redundancy reasons but not
mandatory. In ring configurations MS-SPRing may be used for optional redundancy.

26

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

TMX and ADMX Application


TMX

TDM/Data
Traffic

TMX
TDM/Data
Traffic

Working Line

Protection Line

TMX

TDM/Data
Traffic

ADMX

TMX

Working
Line

Working
Line

Protection
Line

TDM/Data
Traffic

Protection
Line

TDM/Data
Traffic

Fig. 22 TMX and ADMX Application

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

27

Hardware and functionality

Local Cross Connect (LXC) in STAR Topologies


Typically, an operators network consists not only of a single ring but multiple rings,
with each ring covering different geographical boundary. SURPASS hiT 70xx series
can be deployed at the hub of the network as a LXC, routing transit traffic going from
one ring to another ring. With a fully 100 % non blocking switching fabric, any crossconnection between line to line, tributary to tributary, tributary to line or line to
tributary can be realized.

28

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

LXC Application
ADMX/TMX

TDM/Data
Traffic

ADMX/TMX
TDM/Data
Traffic

g
r k in
Wo ine
L

Wo
r ki
Lin ng
e

ADMX/TMX

TDM/Data
Traffic

Pr o
tect
Lin ion
e
g
i
k
r n
Wo ne
Li

n
tio
tec e
o
r
P Lin
Wo
r k in
Line g

LXC

tion
tec
Pro ine
L

ADMX/TMX
TDM/Data
Traffic

Pr o
tec
Lin tion
e

LXC

Fig. 23 LXC Scenario

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

29

Hardware and functionality

30

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

System manuals

Fig. 24 System Manuals

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

31

Hardware and functionality

2.1

Documentation overview

The SURPASS hiT 7080 Customer Documentation comprises the following


descriptions and manuals:
Document
Product description (PD)

Installation and Test


Manual (ITMN)
Interconnect,
Configuration, and
Mechanical Assembly
(ICMA)

Overview of the entire system. Includes description of


features, components, NE types, operating theory,
block diagrams, plug-in card descriptions, and detailed
technical specifications.
Instructions for installing and cabling the equipment.
The ITMN also includes the post-installation
commissioning procedures.
Complete set of drawings that depict rack, subrack, and
plug-in card arrangements, as well as electrical and
fiber cabling plans.

Commissioning Manual
(COMN)

Instructions for commissioning a network element.

Safety Instructions

Instructions and rules for hardware safe handling.

Operating Manual (OMN)

Instructions on the Graphical User Interface of the Local


Craft Terminal (LCT).

Troubleshooting Manual
(TSMN)

Detailed information to troubleshoot and remedy alarm


events.

Open Source Licenses

32

Description

(OSL)

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

OSL

TS-MN

OMN

COMN

ICMA

ITMN

PD

Safety Instr.

Official documentation

Fig. 25 Official documentation

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

33

Hardware and functionality

34

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

Hardware design and functionality

ENS
S IEM

Fig. 26

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

35

Hardware and functionality

3.1
3.1.1

Hardware design
Rack Equipment of SURPASS hiT 7080

The equipment frames meet the ETS 300 119 - 2 requirements.


The racks are unshielded.
In order to minimize the rack spacing of the shelves, the outlets of the optical cables
are at the front of the rack beams. This means that the mounting plane of the rack is
moved to the back.
SURPASS hiT 7080 shall be accommodated in the following ETSI racks:

Standard ETSI Rack.


Nokia Siemens Networks ETSI Rack.
The standard ETSI rack is not recommended to be used because it has limited space
for cabling in the front of the cable duct. Nokia Siemens Networks ETSI rack is the
recommended rack.
The top-most rack slot is used for fitting a terminal panel which supplies equipment
with a DC voltage of 48 V or 60 V from the telecommunications center. The cables
are connected to the terminals at the top of the fuse panel. The power is fed from the
fuse panel to the sub rack(s) using the rack cabling. All electrical lines (connection
lines for the telecommunications center, cabling between the sub racks and the rack
terminal panel) as well as the FO lines will be routed using the upright rails of the
rack and are secured with cable ties.

36

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

Fig. 27 SURPASS hiT 7080 with or without extension shelf measurements

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

37

Hardware and functionality

3.1.2

SURPASS hiT 7080 subrack

The shelf is available with various types of mounting brackets for different rack types
(Standard ETSI, Nokia Siemens Networks ETSI). The shelf mechanical concept is
based on plug-in technique, front access of cards and cable connections.
Each shelf consists of:

Redundant DC Power I/O in the top section


Double row of card slots for installing 33 cards (15 upper row slots and 18 lower
row slots)

2 System Controller (SC) slots


1 System Interface (SI) slot
2 HOCC slots
19 Line Card (LC) traffic slots
9 I/O slots which can be flexibly configured for electrical interface I/O cards

Cable duct for orderly routing of the cables to and from the cards
Fiber duct for orderly routing of the fibers to and from the cards
Two fan units with three fans per unit to cool the system
Backplane with Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) filter
Air filter to protect the electronics and optics from dust and other contaminants
Connector for the grounding of wrist straps

38

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

hiT 7080 Chassis Slots and Backplane Capacity


PWR IO

I
O
1

I
I
O O
2 3

I
O
4

H
S
S
/
I
E
1

19

20

22

23

21

H
S
/
E
1

H
S
/
E
1

H
S
/
E
1

Equipment Core slots


HS slots, 20G & LOCC slots

H
S I I I I I
/ O O O O O
E 5 6 7 8 9
1

24 25 26 27 28 29

30

31

32

HS slots, 20G backplane w.DS3/STM-1E


HS slots, 20G backplane

33

HS slots, 10G backplane w. E1/STM-1E

Fiber Space

HS slots, 20G backplane w. E1/STM-1E


H
S H H H H H H H
O
C S S S S S S S
C
C

H
H H
H H
O
S S
S S
C
/ /
C
E E

10

H
S
/
E

H
S
/
E

H
S
S
C
/
E

11 12 13 14 15 16 17

IO slots
Note: Italic numbers indicate INTERNAL slot numbers
HS
HS/E
HS/E1
HOCC
SC
PWR IO

18

Fiber Duct
Fan Tray
Fan Tray
Air Filter Tray

= High speed slot (20G)


= HS & also support DS3/STM-1E
= 10G High Speed & E1/STM-1E
= High Order Cross-Connect slot
= System Controller slot
= Power Supply slot

Fig. 28 hiT 7080 Chassis Slots and Backplane Capacity I

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

39

Hardware and functionality

3.1.3

Available Card Types and Slot Compatibility

The table below lists the types of cards supported by hiT 7080 Rel. 4.15

Card type
Controller

Cross
connection

Card name

Description

SC

System control card for NE configuration

SI E

System Interface card with EOW

SI

System interface card without EOW

HOCC
LOCC

340 Gbps VC-4 switch fabric


2176 x 2176 VC-4 equivalents
20G VC-3 / VC-12 switch fabric
384 x 384 VC-3 / 16384 x 16384 VC-12

2 x STM-64
SDH

PDH

8 x STM-16
8 x STM-4/1
8 x STM-1 E

STM-1 electrical interface card

126 x E1

2 Mbps interface card, 126 x E1

12 x E3/DS3

34/45 Mbps interface card, 12 x E3/DS3

8 x GE / T
1 x 10GE/T
Ethernet

Optical Interface Card

Transparent Ethernet interface card

6 x GE + 4 FEGE/A
1 x 10 GE + 10 x
GE/L2

Layer 2 Ethernet interface card

RPR

2 x GE + 12 x FE/RPR

RPR Service interface card

OTN

1 x OUT - 2/UF

OTU interface card

POA (20 dB)

Pre amplifier card

OA

BOA (13 dBm)


BOA (15 dBm)

Boost amplifier card

BOA (18 dBm)

40

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

Cards

Slots number

Max

SC

1 and 18

SI / SI-E

23

HOCC

9 and 10

Notes

20 G capacity

6 (W); 7 (P)

40 G capacity

5 (W), 6 (W); 7(P), 8 (P)

2 x STM-64

2 to 8, 12 to 17, (24 to 27)* and 28

19

* Only port 2 can be used due


backplane capacity for these slots.

8 x STM-16

2 to 8, 12 to 17, (24 to 27)* and 28

19

* Only ports 5 to 8 can be used due


backplane capacity for these slots.

LOCC

2 to 8, 12 to 17, 24 to 27 and 28

19

No Protection

13 (W) 30 (I/O); 14 (W) 31 (I/O); 15 (W) 32 (I/O); 16 (W) 33 (I/O)


24 (W) 19 (I/O); 25 (W) 20 (I/O); 26 (W) 21 (I/O); 27 (W) 22 (I/O)

16

1:N Protection

[13 (W) - 30 (I/O); 14 (W) - 31 (I/O); 15 (W) - 32 (I/O); 16 (W) - 33 (I/O)] - 17 (P)
[24 (W) - 19 (I/O); 25 (W) - 20 (I/O); 26 (W) - 21 (I/O); 27 (W) - 22 (I/O)] - 28 (P)

18

8 x STM-4/-1

8 x STM-1 E +
8 x STM-1 E I/O

No protection

13 (W) 30 (I/O); 14 (W) 31 (I/O); 16 (W) 32 (I/O); 17 (W) 33 (I/O)

1:N Protection

[13 (W) - 30 (I/O); 14 (W) - 31 (I/O); 16 (W) - 32 (I/O); 17 (W) - 33 (I/O)] - 15 (P)

No Protection

24 (W) [19 + 20] (I/O); 25 (W) [21 + 22] (I/O); 27 (W) [29 + 30] (I/O); 28
(W) [31 + 32] (I/O)

12

1:N Protection

{24 (W) [19 + 20] (I/O); 25 (W) [21 + 22] (I/O); 27 (W) [29 + 30] (I/O); 28
(W) [31 + 32] (I/O)} 26 (P)

13

1 x 10 GE +
10 x GE / L2

5 + 6; 6 + 7; 7 + 8; 11 + 12; 12 + 13; 13 + 14

1 x 10 GE / T

2 to 8, 12 to 17, 24 to 27 and 28

19

8 x GE / T

2 to 8, 12 to 17, 24 to 27 and 28

19

6 x GE + 4 x FEGE/A

2 to 8, 12 to 14, 16, 17

2 x GE + 12 x FE/RPR

2 to 8, 12 to 17, 24 to 27 and 28

19

1 x OTU-2/UF

2 to 8, 12 to 17, 24 to 27 and 28

19

OA

2 to 8, 12 to 17, 24 to 27 and 28

19

12 x E3/DS3 +
12 x E3/DS3 I/O

126 x E1 +
63 x E1 (I/O)

Interworking with Fujitsu DWDM


system; not for general availability

Fig. 29 Card Types and Slot Compatibility

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

41

Hardware and functionality

42

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

LOCC and E1 card protection group rules

Fig. 30 Card protection group rules I

E3/DS3 and STM-1e card protection group rules

Fig. 31 Card protection group rules II

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

43

Hardware and functionality

3.2
3.2.1

Functionality
Overview

The SURPASS hiT 7080 as Next Generation SDH system comes with TDM and
packet switching fabrics. Due to the flexibility of the design, the hiT 7080 systems can
accommodate both VC-4 and VC-12 switching fabric within a single sub-rack.
By allowing different TDM fabrics to converge under one common platform,
SURPASS hiT 7080 is effectively transformed to a 10 Gbps system with scalable
switching granularity from VC-4 right down to VC-12.
In addition SURPASS hiT 7080 can also be equipped with L2 switch cards. It
switches the frames to its destination port based on the VLAN and Ethernet MAC
address.

3.2.2

Block Diagram

The hiT 7080 basic architecture is shown in the block diagram (see Fig. 32).
The system is composed of:

Core Functionalities
SDH Functionalities
Ethernet Functionalities
PDH Functionalities

3.2.3

System Core

The core configuration consists of the following units:

Chassis and backplane (including Power I/O at the top)


Redundant Fan Units and a Filter Unit at the bottom
Redundant System Control (SC) board
System Interface (SI E) board
Redundant HOCC board

44

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

SURPASS hiT 7080 Block Diagram


System Core

20G
LOCC

MGT-1/2
MDO/MDI
User Channels
ALM
EOW
EXT-1..4 (res.)

System
Clock
Unit

SI-E
System
Interface

340G

VC-3/12
Switch

T4-1/2
T3 1/2

20G
LOCC

HOCC
VC-4 Switch

SC
System
Controller

VC-3/12
Switch

Ethernet
Card

SDH Card

...

Packet
Fabric

L2
Ethernet
Card

PDH
Card

...

...

Fig. 32 Block Diagram for hiT 7080

SURPASS hiT 7080 : System Core


PWR IO

I
O
1

I
O
2

I
O
3

I
O
4

S
I

H
S
/
E
1

H
S
/
E
1

H
S
/
E
1

H
S
/
E
1

H
I
S I
/ O O
E 5 6
1

19

20

21

22

23

24 25 26 27 28

29

30

I
O
7

I
I
O O
8 9

31

32

Equipment Core slots

33

Fiber Space

H
S H H H H H H H
O
C S S S S S S S
C
C

H
H H
H H
O
S S
S S
C
/ /
C
E E

10

H
S
/
E

H
S
/
E

H
S
S
C
/
E

11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Fiber Duct
Fan Tray
Fan Tray
Air Filter Tray

18

HS
HS/E
HS/E1
HOCC
SC
PWR IO

=High speed slot (20G)


=HS & also support DS3/STM-1E
=10G High Speed & E1/STM-1E
=High Order Cross-Connect slot
=System Controller slot
=Power Supply slot

Fig. 33 SURPASS hiT 7080 System Core

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

45

Hardware and functionality

SC card
The SC card is the main control unit for SURPASS hiT 7080. It performs system
initialization, configuration, monitoring, and maintenance.
The SURPASS hiT 7080 can be equipped with redundant SC cards (1 + 1) to provide
customers with even higher reliability and stability. While the system is running,
configuration information, run time data, and other files are constantly synchronized
from the active to the standby card. In the event of a failure for the active card, the
standby card will become active and take over all SC functions the previously active
card allowing continuous control and full NE functionality. Switch from active to
standby cards can be triggered either manually by the operator or automatically in
case of failure.
The SC card is the main control unit for SURPASS hiT 7080. It performs system
initialization, configuration, monitoring and maintenance.
A Compact Flash (CF) memory card is equipped in the SC card. The NE database,
Management Information Base (MIB), system software and configurations are stored
in this nonvolatile memory card, which supports quick recovery in the event of power
failure, node failure or unit replacement.
On the card faceplate a DB9 (RS232) connector is provided. This interface is used to
connect a user terminal to carry out the initial IP address configuration of the network
element during the commissioning phase.
Four LEDs at the faceplate provide state information (see Fig. 35).
Via the Reset button a warm reboot of the SC card can be triggered.

46

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

System Controller SC
1 DB 9 (RS 232) Serial
Serial Line
Line interface
1 reset button
Warm reboot SC
LED
1 ACT (green)
1 PWR (green)
1 FAULT (red)
1 CF (green)
Pluggable CF card (512MB)
Store MIB and software load

Fig. 34 System Controller SC

SC Card: Faceplate LEDs


LED

Color

Status

CF

Green

On
Flashing

ACT

Green

FAULT

Green

Red

CF card is available
LED test

Off

CF card is not available

On

Working under EPG active state

Flashing

PWR

Description

LED test

Off

Working under standby state (not supported yet)

On

Indicate present internal power supply

Off

Power is not available

On

One or more alarms are present or the card is booting.

Flashing
Off

LED test
No alarms are present, and card is in service.

Fig. 35 Faceplate LED state meanings

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

47

Hardware and functionality

SI and SI E cards (System Interface)


Both (SI and SI E) card provides the following main functions:

TNMS CT and TNMS Core access


Station clock synchronization access
MDI and MDO access
Alarm outputs
User Channel access
LED TEST, Alarm Cut Off (ACO) and Alarm Suppress (SUP) buttons
The difference between the SI and the SI-E card is the EOW function, where is
supported in the SI - E card.
Interface
T3 1, T3 2,
T4 1, T4 2
MDI 1 4,
MDI 5 8
MDO 1 4
MDO 5 8
ALM
HCOC 1,
HCOC 2
EOW
(Only on SI - E
card)

4 x RJ 45 connectors for four station clock interfaces, T3 stands


for clock in (2 Mbps or 2 MHz) and T4 stands for clock out (2
Mbps or 2 MHz).
2 x RJ 45 connectors to provide eight Miscellaneous Discrete
Input (MDI) ports. MDI's are used to read the status of external
alarm-points. Both the MDI description and severities are
configurable on the management system.
2 x RJ 45 connectors to provide eight Miscellaneous Discrete
Output (MDO) ports. MDO's are used to drive the external
devices. MDO can be activated or deactivated manually by the
management system.
RJ 45 alarm output interface, providing four alarm outputs,
including two audio and two visible alarm outputs.
2 x RJ 45 connectors for two extended user channels, two V.11
ports in total.
RJ 45 connector for E1 and E2. There are a maximum of 64
EOW channels (32 x E1 and 32 x E2). One to one or multiple
user calls can be performed through this interface.

MGT 1, MGT 2

2 x RJ 45 connectors for network management interfaces.

EXT 1, EXT 2,
EXT 3, EXT 4

4 x RJ 45 connectors for real extension shelf management.


(These ports are reserved for future use.)

F1 1, F1 2
DEBUG

48

Description

2 x RJ 45 connectors for two F1 user channels, two V.11 ports


in total.
Mini USB type port for module debugging.

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

SI (System Interface card) and

System
Interface
with
EOW:
SI E
SI-E (System
Interface
card
with EOW)
Buttons:
.- LED Test
.- ACO (Alarm Cutt off)
.- SUP (Alarm supression)
LEDs:
.- PWR (green color)
.- FAULT (red color)
.- CR Critical alarms (red color)
- on: one or more critical communication alarms are present
- flash: one or more critical non communications are present
- off: no critical alarms are present
.- MJ Major alarm (orange color)
.- MN Minor alarms (yellow color)

LED
Description

Buttons

PWR

LED TEST

CR

Interfaces:
.- Mini USB
.- Two MGM ports
For TNMS and LCT sumultaneos access
.- EOW access (Only available on SI E card)
.- Two ports T3 and two ports T4 for Station Clock
Synchronization
.- Eight MDIs access (two ports)
.- Eight MDOs access (two ports)
.- Alarm output
.- Two User Channels
.- Two HCOC interfaces
.- Four interfaces for extension Shelf

HCOC2

TEST

LED test button

T3-1 T3-2

T4-1

T4-2

ALM HCOC1

EOW

MDO1-4

MDI1-4

ACO

Alarm cut off button. The alarm outputs connected to the rack-top alarming module will be cut off by
pushing the button one time. System indicators (critical, major, and minor LEDs) on the NE will not be
suppressed.

SUP

Alarm suppress button.


When the
button isEXT-3
pushed, the
existing
(visible critical/major/minor
LED
MGT-1
EXT-1
F1-1
F1-2 alarmsMDO5-8
MDI5-8
indicators) on the SI card will
not be shown
system and the rack-top alarm module when the
MGT-2
EXT-2 on the
EXT-4
MJ
MN ACO SUP
button is pushed until the next alarm occurs.

DEBUG

FAULTY

Fig. 36 SI and SI E cards

BUTTONS

LEDs

SI and SI-E faceplate cards

INTERFACES
EOW

Fig. 37 SI and SI - E faceplate cards

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

49

Hardware and functionality

HOCC card
SURPASS hiT 7080 supports 340 Gbps (2176 x 2176 VC-4s) high order fabric
capacity that can interconnect AU4's between any SDH and Ethernet port accessing
the system. The switch fabric provides non blocking switching of traffic at VC-4,
VC-4-4c, VC-4-16c and VC-4-64c levels.
Two HOCC slots are available which support HOCC card 1 + 1 protection.
LOCC
SURPASS hiT 7080 supports a 20 Gbps low order switching capacity on one card
that can interconnect TU-12s and TU-3s between any SDH and Ethernet port
accessing the system. The switch fabric provides non-blocking switching of traffic at
VC-12 and VC-3 levels.
For added LOCC capacity the SURPASS hiT 7080 can use two LOCC working cards
together to support a 40 Gbps capacity. Upgrade from 20 Gbps to 40 Gbps LOCC
capacity can be done without traffic interruption.
SURPASS hiT 7080 provides up to four HS slots which support LOCC card 1 + 1
protection for both 20 Gbps and 40 Gbps applications.
The LOCC card can be equipped in the following manner:
Protected:
20 G LOCC: slot 6 working and slot 7 protection
40 G LOCC: slot 5 and 6 working and slot 7 and 8 protection
TIP
The LOCC can be upgraded from 20 G to 40 G without any traffic interruption by
adding new LOCC cards to slot 5 and 8.
Unprotected:
20 G LOCC: slot 6
40 G LOCC: slot 5 and 6

50

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

Cross connection arquitecture

Fig. 38 Cross-connection architecture

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

51

Hardware and functionality

Power Distribution
The Breaker Panel is mounted on top of the rack. Four circuit breakers (20 A) are
used for the hiT 7080 shelf in the rack (two for working power supply and two for
protection power supply). Two pre-manufactured cables with fast-on terminals are
used to interconnect to the Power Input connectors at the top of the subracks.
Overvoltage protection and EMI filtering is provided by the Power I/O section. Input
Power monitoring is performed by the SC card. Status LEDs at the power I/O section
indicate that the corresponding power supply is on.
Equipment plug-in-units are equipped with a power converter (decentralized power
supply) that provides all necessary supply voltages to the specific card. The power
converter is operated from two independent battery feeds.

FAN
Two fan units are used to cool the system. Each fan unit is equipped with three fans.
The state of fans is monitored by the system.
The FAULT LED on the front panel indicates the fault state of any fan in the fan unit.
WARNING
The system can not work without any fan unit.

TIP
The system can still work normally within 16 hours if only one fan unit has failed. The
action of the fan unit replacement must be finished within 2 minutes.
Filter unit
One filter unit is used to protect the main shelf from environmental dust. A state
supervision of the filter unit is not provided by the system.
WARNING
An excessively dirty filter unit will reduce cooling airflow.

TIP
The filter unit replacement must be treated as a periodic maintenance procedure to
ensure that the fans are able to sustain optimum shelf operating temperature.

52

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

Power Distribution

RET/RED
-48V/BLUE
RET/ORANGE
-48V/BLACK

RET/RED
-48V/BLUE
RET/ORANGE
-48V/BLACK

WORKING

PROTECTING

RETURN/RED
-48V/BLUE

RETURN/ORANGE
-48V/BLACK

RETURN/RED
-48V/BLUE

Power(A)

RETURN/ORANGE
-48V/BLACK

Power(B)

Fig. 39 Power Distribution

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

53

Hardware and functionality

3.2.4

PDH Interface Cards

12 x E3/DS3 (W/P) Interface Card


The 12 x E3/DS3 interface card can be divided into two modules:

12 x E3/DS3 Function Card (processing card)


12 x E3/DS3 I/O Card with 75 Ohms impedance CC4 connectors
Each E3/DS3 port can be configured as E3 or DS3 transmission mode. The E3/DS3
(W/P) card must be installed accompanied by its I/O card. Each E3/DS3 signal is
mapped into a Low Order VC-3 and forwarded to line interface for transmission.
There are 24 CC4 connectors and every E3/DS3 interface uses two CC4 connectors.
For I/O cards, there is only one LED PWR, which indicates the status of the cards
power.
126 x E1/R (W/P) Interface Card
This card can be divided into two modules as following:

126 E1/R (W/P) Function Card


63 E1/R I/O (75 or 120 Ohms) Interface Card
The 126 x E1/R (W/P) card is used in combination with two 63 x E1 I/O boards. The
connector is based 2 mm connector.
The board on the left side handles the first 63 ports and the board on the right
side handles ports 64 until 126.
In 126 x E1/R cards, any one of the E1 ports could be used as the timing source, but
the maximum four ports can be selected as the same time.
The retiming function can be enabled or disabled for any of the 126 E1 ports on the
LCT or the TNMS. With retiming function enable, the transmitter eliminates wander
and jitter in the incoming clock. While the rate of the outgoing 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz
signal is normally equal to the rate of the 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz signal going into the SDH
network, occasionally this relationship disappears. A retiming function is necessary
for suppression of jitter and wander that the 2 Mbit/s signal suffers during
transmission in SDH and which makes the signal useless for carrying the
synchronous frequency to the PDH domain.
To retime an outgoing 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz signal, means simply to retime this signal
with the internal clock of the multiplexer equipment in which the desynchronization
takes place. This can be done by reading the recovered 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz signal into
an elastic store and timing the output of the elastic store with the system clock.
When the device is set in the retiming mode all jitter and wander due to the
multiplexing or demultiplexing process in the transmission is eliminated.
The SURPASS hiT 7080 chassis supports 1:4 protection for the E1 card against the
equipment failure and carrier class Equipment protection switching.

54

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

SURPASS hiT
hiT 7080 PDH Cards
Cards
SURPASS
PDH Cards

Core Cards
CTRL &
OH Access

SCOH
W

12 x E3/DS3 I/O

12 x 34/45 M electrical ports

12 x E3/DS3

1:N Card Portection

63 x E1 I/O

System

SI

Interface

63 x E1 I/O
126 x E1

126 x 2M electrical ports


1:N Card Protection

High Order
Switch Frabric
340 G @ VC-4

HOCC
W

and SETS

SDH Cards

(Card Protection)
Low Order
Switch Frabric

Ethernet Cards

LOCC
W

20 G @ VC-3/-12

(Card Protection)

Amplifier Cards

Fig. 40 Surpass hiT 7080: PDH Cards

PDH Cards Faceplates


12 x E3/DS3

12 x E3/DS3 I/O

CC4 connector

126 x E1

63 x E1 I/O

2 mm connector

Fig. 41 PDH Cards Faceplates

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

55

Hardware and functionality

3.2.5

SDH Interface Cards

SURPASS hiT 7080 provides the following SDH interfaces:


8 STM-1 E interface Card
This card can be divided in two parts:

8 x STM-1E Function Card.


8 x STM-1E IO Card with Ohm impedance CC4 connector.
The 8 x STM-1E (W/P) card is used in combination with 8 x STM-1E IO cards.
The SURPASS hiT 7080 chassis supports two groups of 1: 4 protection for the STM1E card against the equipment failure and carrier class equipment protection
switching.
Any pair of STM-1 electrical ports in same or different 8 x STM-1E (W/P) cards can
be set to support SNCP/I, SNCP/N, MSP, EOW and DCC (including OSI-light, GRE
tunnel, third-party DCC transparency, etc.).
8 STM-4/-1
The 8 x STM-4/-1 card provides eight STM-4/1 ports compliant with ITU-T G.957, or
eight electrical STM-1 ports compliant with ITU-T G.703.
The card can be equipped with up to eight STM-4 or STM-1 optical SFP modules or
STM-1 electrical SFP modules. Each port on this card can be configured to STM-4 or
STM-1 (default) mode through TNMS CT or TNMS Core.
It is possible to mix freely the different SFP modules within one traffic card.
The card supports 1+1 and 1: N MSP protection, SNCP protection and 2F MSSPRing protection.
8 STM-16
This card provides eight STM-16 ports compliant with ITU-T G.957 and ITU-T G.695.
The card can be equipped with up to eight STM-16 optical SFP modules.
It is possible to mix the different SFP modules within one traffic card.
The card supports 1+1 and 1: N MSP protection, SNCP protection and 2F MSSPRing protection.
2 STM-64
This card provides two STM-64 ports compliant with ITU-T G.691 and Transport
System Generic Requirements (TSGR) GR-1377-Core.
The card can be equipped with a maximum of two STM-64 optical XFP modules.
It is possible to mix the different XFP modules within one traffic card.
The card supports 1+1 and 1: N MSP protection, SNCP protection and 2F MSSPRing protection.

56

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

SURPASS hiT 7080 SDH Cards


PDH Cards

Core Cards
SDH Cards
CTRL &
OH Access

SCOH
P

8 x STM-1 E

SI

System Interface

8 x STM-1 electrical ports

8 x STM-1 I/O

8 x STM-4/1

1+1, 1:N MSP and SNCP

S
F
P

340 G @ VC-4

8 x STM-1 electrical
1+1, 1:N MSP or 2F-MS-SPRing for STM-4

High Order
Switch Frabric

8 x STM-1 optical or

HOCC

8 x STM-16

and SETS

S
F
P

8 x STM-16 optical
1+1, 1:N MSP or 2F-MS-SPRing for STM-16

(Card Protection)

2 x STM-64

Low Order
Switch Frabric

LOCC

20 G @ VC-3/-12

S
F
P

2 x STM-64 optical
1+1, 1:N MSP or 2F-MS-SPRing for STM-64

Ethernet Cards

W
P

(Card Protection)

Amplifier Cards

Fig. 42 SURPASS hiT 7080: SDH Cards

SDH Cards Faceplates


8 x STM-1 E Card

8 x STM-1 I/O Card

CC4 connector

8 x STM-4/1 Card

8 x STM-16 Card

SFP

LINK

2 x STM-64 Card

XFP

LINK

Fig. 43 SDH Cards Faceplates

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

57

Hardware and functionality

3.2.6

Data Interface Cards

SURPASS hiT 7080 supports the following data service cards:


8 GE/T
The card provides eight Gigabit Ethernet optical interfaces (SFP) on the client side
which only supports transparent transmission function. GE signal is encapsulated into
GFP packets and then mapped into mixed VC-4-Xv and VC-3-Xv payload for
transmission. The total bandwidth is up 10 G. All ports can work at a wire speed
simultaneously.
Additionally, the first two ports can be configured working as standard 1 Gbit/s
Ethernet or 1.0625 Gbps Fiber Channel working mode. When these ports are
working as 1Gbit/s FC, GFP-T will be used.
It is possible to mix the different SFP modules within one traffic card.
Other detail features are listed below:

VCAT supported
LCAS supported, according to ITU-T G.7042
Differential delay per VCG group tolerance up to 128 ms
6 x GE + 4 x FEGE/A
The card provides 6 x GE optical SFP interfaces (or electrical SFP interfaces) and 4
electrical 10/100/1000 M auto negotiation interfaces (RJ-45 interface).
The Layer main functions supported by this card are as follows:

LAN / WAN ports aggregation.


Auto negotiation, flow control, IEEE 802.3, and Ethernet II frames structure
supported by the FE/GE ports.

Access Control List (ACL) based on MAC addresses.


VLAN and double VLAN tagging, providing increased number of VLANs.
Rapid Spanning Tree (802.1 w) and Multiple Spanning Tree (802.1s), dramatically
reducing restoration time.

Providing per port rate limiting function: The rate range of each port is from 128
Kbps to 100 Mbps (FE) or 128 Kbps to 1 Gbps (GE), and the rate provisioning
granularity is 128 Kbps.

Providing per VLAN rate limiting function. The rate range of each VLAN is from

128 Kbps to 100 Mbps (FE) or 128 Kbps to 1Gbps (GE), and the rate provisioning
granularity is 128 Kbps.

Providing 802.1p QoS/CoS based on Ethernet port and/or VLAN.

58

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

SURPASS hiT 7080 Ethernet Cards


PDH Cards

Core Cards

SDH Cards

CTRL &

SCOH

OH Access

Ethernet Cards

W
P

SI

System Interface

High Order
Switch Frabric

HOCC

340 G @ VC-4

8 x GE / T

S
F
P

6 x GE +
4 x FEGE / A

S
F
P

2 x GE +
12 x FE / RPR

S
F
P

1 x 10 GE / T

X
F
P

8 x GE electrical or optical ports


(2 x FC) optical
6 x GE optical / electrical and
4 x FE/GE electrical
2 x GE electrical or optical
6 x FE electrical interfaces

and SETS

(Card Protection)

1 x 10 GE +
10 x GE / L2

Low Order

LOCC

Switch Frabric

1 x 10 GE optical
1 x 10 GE optical

XFP
S
F
P

10 x GE optical or electrical

20 G @ VC-3/-12

(Card Protection)

Amplifier Cards

Fig. 44 SURPASS hiT 7080: Ethernet cards

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

59

Hardware and functionality

Layer 2 multicast functions, including static provisioned multicast and IGMP


Snooping multicast functions.

LCAS supported
GFP encapsulation (ITU - T G.7041/Y.1303)
The card support 10 GE LAN ports and 12 GE + 24 FE WAN ports.
Each 100M WAN port can be mapped to VC-12-Xv (X = 1...46) or VC-3-Xv (X = 1...3)
via GFP, mixed VC-12-Xv and VC-3-Xv is supported and also LCAS.
Each 1000M WAN port can be mapped to VC-3-Xv (X = 1...21) or VC-4-Xv (X = 1...7)
via GFP, mixed VC-3-Xv and VC-4-Xv is supported and also LCAS.
The total bandwidth is up 64 x VC-4 (10 G).
2 GE + 12 FE RPR
The card provides RPR function on SDH. There are 12 x 10/100 M Base T
interfaces (RJ-45) and 2 x GE optical / electrical SFP interfaces on the client side.
This module supports L2 switching, RPR MAC, GFP, virtual concatenation and
LCAS. There are two WAN ports on the network side. The bandwidth of each port is
8 x VC-4. The total bandwidth is up to 2.5 G
The Layer 2 functions supported by this module are:

VLAN and double tagging, providing increased member of VLANs


A shareable memory space for both FE and GE interfaces on each card
Access Control List (ACL) based on MAC address
Rate limiting per port / VLAN: the rate range of each port is from 64 Kbps to 100

Mbps (FE) or 64 Kbps to 1 Gbps (GE) and the rate provisioning granularity is 64
Kbps. Each FE and GE interfaces provides enough buffers to support burst data
traffic transmission and consequently make traffic congestion under control.

RPR function:

SDH especial reuse.


Source weighted fairness (Class B and C traffic only)
Handle three classes of Services (Class A, B and C). Class A traffic can occupy up
to 50 % of total RPR bandwidth and only the class A traffic supports strict order
transmission.

Per port based service rate limiting function: The rate of each port is from 128

Kbps to 100 Mbps (FE) or 128 Kbps to 1 Gbps (GE), and the rate provisioning
granularity is 128 Kbps.

Per VLAN based service rate limiting function: The rate range of each VLAN is
from 128 Mbps to 100 Mbps (FE) or 128 Mbps to 1 Gbps (GE), and the rate
provisioning granularity is 128 Kbps.

RPR layer protection: steering or wrapping protection (user provisional).


60

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

Ethernet Faceplate Cards


8 x GE / T

SFP

LINK

6 x GE + 4 FEGE / A

RJ 45 connector
2 x GE + 12 x FE / RPR

Fig. 45 Ethernet Faceplate Cards I

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

61

Hardware and functionality

Topology discovery
FE ports support auto negotiation, flow control, IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet II frame
structure

GFP encapsulation according with ITU-T G.7041 / Y.1303


Virtual concatenation (VC-4-Xv; VC-3-Xv and VC-12-Xv) and LCAS functionality
SDH and Ethernet performance monitoring and alarms.
1 10GE/T
This card provides one 10 Gigabit Ethernet optical interface with the transparent
transmission function (P2P). The total bandwidth is up to 64 x VC-4 (10G). One VCG
groups will be supported and it can be mapped into VC-4-Xv (X = 1...64). GFP-F
encapsulation is used for Ethernet frame.
Summary of key functions:

The 10 GE ports support flow control and it can be configurable (enable/ disable).
Support LCAS.
Performance monitoring function.
The 10 GE port can be transmitted full speed and full duplex mode.
Admin Shutdown / ALS / Port Monitoring functions supported. Admin Shutdown

will turn off the port. All traffic on this port will be blocked. All received traffic will be
dropped and no signal will be sent out when it is shutdown.

1 x 10 GE + 10 x GE / L2
The 1 x 10 GE + 10 x GE/L2 is a 20 G layer 2 Ethernet card with a 40 G switch
capacity which is composed of a mother and daughter card together (occupying 2
physical slots in the NE) providing 11 LAN ports and 80 WAN ports.

Front panel interfaces:


One 10 GE optical XFP interface (mother card).
Ten GE optical or electrical SFP interfaces (daughter card).

Backplane side:
40 x WAN ports sharing up to 10 G (64 x VC-4) for the 10 GE mother card.
40 x WAN ports sharing up to 10 G (64 x VC-4) for the 10 x GE daughter card.
The 1 x 10 GE + 10 x GE/L2 card supports L2 switching, GFP, high/low order virtual
concatenation, LCAS, and LAN / WAN port aggregation. Two WAN ports (VCG 1 and
VCG 41) can be configured with up to 10 Gbps of bandwidth using VC-4-Xv (X = 1 to
64) or VC-3-Xv (X = 1 to 192). The other 78 WAN ports (VCG 2 - 40 and VCG 42 -

62

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

Ethernet Faceplate cards


1 x 10 GE / T

XFP
1 x 10 GE + 10 x GE / L2

SFP

Fig. 46 Ethernet Faceplate Cards

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

63

Hardware and functionality

80) can be configured with up to 2 Gbps using VC-4-Xv (X = 1 to 14) or VC-3-Xv (X =


1 to 42).
The main functions supported by this card are as follows:

LAN / WAN port aggregation


Multicast IGMP snooping
VLAN and double VLAN tagging
VLAN translation
Link Aggregation
128k MAC addresses (shared among dynamic, static, and multicast addresses)
ACL based on MAC addresses
Multiple policing options including: CIR; EIR; PIR; CBS; EBS.
Priority settings according to:
DiffServ value in incoming frame
Transparent transport of MPLS frames
Per port rate limiting function: The rate range of each port is as follows:
128 Kbps to 100 Mbps for FE
128 Kbps to 1 Gbps for GE
2.3 Mbps to 10 Gbps for 10 GE

The rate provisioning granularity is 128 Kbps for FE and GE; 1 Mbps for 10 GE
Per VLAN rate limiting function.
Auto negotiation, flow control, IEEE 802.3, and Ethernet II frame structure
supported by the FE/GE/10 GE ports

GFP encapsulation (ITU-T G.7041/Y.1303)


VC-4-Xv (X = 1 to 7), VC-3-Xv (X = 1 to 21), and LCAS function supported by the
GE WAN port

SDH and Ethernet performance monitoring and alarms


GMRP function
GVRP function
MSTP function

64

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

SURPASS hiT 7080 Amplifier Cards


PDH Cards
SDH Cards

Core Cards

Ethernet Cards

CTRL &

Amplifier Cards

SCOH

OH Access

RX

POA 20 dB
System Interface

SI

STM-16

TX

BOA 13 dBm

STM-1/4/16/64

Switch Frabric
340 G @ VC-4

HCOCC

and SETS

TX

BOA 15 dBm

STM-1/4/16

(Card Protection)

TX

BOA 18 dBm

STM-1/4/16

Fig. 47 SURPASS hiT 7080: Amplifier cards

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

65

Hardware and functionality

3.2.7

Optical Amplifier Cards

This OA (Optical Amplifier) module provides uni-directional single optical amplifier


function with optical performance monitoring capabilities. This module is designed to
compensate losses in the entire C band as Booster or Pre-amplifier in the Metro
networks.
The following variants are available:

Optical Booster Amplifier 18 dBm


Optical Booster Amplifier 15 dBm
Optical Booster Amplifier 13 dBm
Optical Pre-Amplifier 20 dB
The EDFA (Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier) sub-module is the core building block for
the Optical Amplifier cards. It provides optical signal amplification function. With
integrated fast digital circuit and advanced software, the EDFAs can be configured to
operate at APC, ACC or AGC mode.

APC (automatic power control) mode: In this mode, the optical output power is
maintained constant by adjusting the laser pump current to compensate minor
changes in OA input power, component aging, and temperature variation. This
mode is mainly used in Booster application.

AGC (automatic gain control) mode: In this mode, the OA provides constant

power gain by adjusting the pump laser current in order to compensate minor
changes in component aging and temperature. This mode is mainly used in preamplifier application.

ACC (automatic current control) mode: In this mode, the pump laser current is
maintained constant.

These modes can be set through software according to customers requirements. In


addition, other significant parameters that need to be pre-set are the Input optical
power low threshold, the Output optical power low threshold and the Low and High
temperature threshold for output power shutdown.

3.2.8

Dispersion Compensation Module

The dispersion compensation module can be used in conjunction with the STM-16
interfaces in order to achieve large distances.
The DCM is a 1U high external module that can be installed in the same rack as the
hiT7080.
The module name is:

Disp. Comp. Module G.652, 40km, 6dB

66

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

Application Example for BOA, POA and DCM

180km
18dBm
18dBm
BOA
BOA

Tx
Tx

20dBm
20dBm
POA
POA

DCM
DCM
40km
40km

Rx
Rx

STM-16

DCM
DCM
40km
40km

Rx
Rx

20dBm
20dBm
POA
POA

18dBm
18dBm
BOA
BOA

Tx
Tx

Fig. 48 SURPASS hiT 7080: Example for BOA, POA and DCM

hiT 7080: Amplifier Card Faceplates


PWR

POA 20dB
LINK

FAULT
PWR

BOA 13 dBm
LINK

FAULT
PWR

BOA 15 dBm
LINK

FAULT
PWR

BOA 18 dBm
LINK

FAULT

Fig. 49 hiT 7080: Amplifier Card Faceplates

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

67

Hardware and functionality

3.2.9

SFP/XFP Modules

In hiT 7080 for the optical interface units (i.e. STM-1/-4/-16/-64 Interfaces and Gigabit
Ethernet interfaces) pluggable optical modules are used.

SFP modules are used for STM-1/-4/-16 as well as for GbE interfaces.
XFP modules are used for STM-64 interfaces.
There are no restrictions for equipping the boards with the SFP/XFP Modules, any
combinations of unequipped and all available modules are possible.
There is also the possibility to use STM-1el SFP Modules and electrical Gigabit
Ethernet SFP Modules in respective optical interface units.

68

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Hardware and functionality

GBIC, XFP and SFP modules

Fig. 50 GBIC, XFP and SFP modules

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

69

Hardware and functionality

70

FT52423EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

Operating terminal

Contents
1
1.1
1.2
2
2.1
2.2
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
4

System manuals
Documentation overview
1.2 Online help system
General features
Introduction
Functional overview
Getting started
What you need to navigate
Basic operations
Connecting to the Network Element
Exercises

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

3
4
6
9
10
12
19
20
28
42
53

Operating terminal

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

System manuals

Fig. 1

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

1.1

Documentation overview

The documentation of the TNMS CT (Telecommunication Network Management


System Craft Terminal) comprises the following descriptions and manuals:

The User Manual (UMN)


The User Manual (UMN) consists of the following main chapters:

Information
This chapter provides an overview of the applications, system architecture,
features and functions of TNMS CT.

Installation
This chapter contains instructions on installing the TNMS CT software.

Operation
This chapter contains a general description of the TNMS CT user interfaces as
well as the necessary background information.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
The content of the Graphical User Interface Manual is identical to the complete
Online Help, but converted to a printable PDF file. In addition, every GUI-related help
window is supplemented by a sample screenshot.
All TNMS CT manuals are available on CD-ROM, and can be ordered in English from
SIEMENS Technical Sales.
In order to be able to read the PDF files properly, you need

Windows

UNIX

Windows 95/98

SUN Solaris 2.5 or higher

Windows NT/2000/XP
and Acrobat Reader (Version 8 is part of installation package) with search function.

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

Official documentation

U
M
N

G
U
I
M
N

Fig. 2 Official documentation

Documentation on CD-ROM

UMN
(pdf)

GUIMN
(pdf)

Acrobat
Reader

Fig. 3 Documentation on CD-ROM

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

1.2

1.2

Online help system

You can use the online help system that is provided with the TNMS CT software to
receive information about all the window contents and menus. The Contents, Index
and Find tabs enable the online help to be searched quickly and conveniently. You
may also display essential steps of important operating sequences via the help table
of contents. Individual help topics can be printed, and context-sensitive help texts
called up directly from the user interface.
Internet explorer setting
To view the help pages normally, set the internet explorer as follows:
Tools tab Internet Options window Advanced tab Security setting
select Allow active content to run in files on My Computer
Help can be requested in any of the following ways:
1. After calling up Help from the menu bar, you can search for topics via the table of
contents, via the index or via a full-text search.
2. Clicking the Help button in the current window, displays information about the
window contents.
3. Pressing <F1> displays information about the contents of the window that is
active at the moment.
TIP
The Online Help gives detailed information on the tasks that are to be performed with
TNMS CT. It also provides detailed description about the individual windows, fields,
and icons used in TNMS CT.

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

2
1

Fig. 4 TNMS CT: Online Help

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Operating terminal

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

General features

Fig. 5

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

2.1

Introduction

TNMS CT is a common platform solution for different Network Element (NE) types.
This management system basically consists of PC hardware (standard PC) and an
Operation, Administration and Maintenance (OAM) PC software, which provides a
high performance supervision and control tool using the internal supervision and
control software implemented in the Network Elements. TNMS CT is a transparent
software platform for SDH and WDM network elements using:

QD2
QST
Q3
SNMP
telegram protocols.
TNMS CT provides access to network elements via:

Network interface (Ethernet) or


Serial line interface (RS232) (not supported by hiT 7080).
TNMS CT allows local as well as remote operation and control. It is possible to
open more than one NE application at the same time. This way there is the additional
possibility to have a graphical network view, concerning fault detection and network
management.
The TNMS CT menu items and dialogues allow the supported communication
channels to be set up. The network element to be operated is selected by a simple
procedure, adapted to the requirements of the connected communication channel.
TNMS CT enables addresses to be assigned to the network elements. The
program icons for these applications are used to present the assigned network
elements in the network view.

10

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

TNMS CT (Craft Terminal)


TNMS CT
Server

Remote
client

WAN / Internet
WAN
/ Internet

TNMS CT
Server

Remote
client

LAN
LCT

hiT 7500
hiT 7300
LCT

hiT 70xx

hiT 70xx

STM-16
BSHR/4

STM-16
BSHR/4
hiT 70xx

hiT 70xx

hiT 70xx

MSP 1+1

hiT 7070

MSP 1+1

Fig. 6 TNMS CT (Craft Terminal)

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

11

Operating terminal

2.2
2.2.1

Functional overview
Client/server Architecture

TNMS CT is a scalable single user system with a client / server architecture


comprising several industry standard PCs with the MS Windows 2000 or XP
operating system and various software applications.
The TNMS CT software comprises of a Client and a Server component.

Client component: It provides a network management user interface. Via this GUI
all TNMS CT management functions, e.g. invoking of element managers, are
available.

Server component: It holds the EML packages and the Net Server frame, which
provides the environment for running EML servers, DCN connectors and NE
controllers.

Client and Server software components can be installed on one PC as well as on


separate PC's.

12

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

TNMS CT: Client/server architecture


Remote
client

TNMS CT
Server

TNMS CT Client & Server


components

TNMS CT Client
component

WAN / Internet
WAN
/ Internet

TNMS CT
Server

Local
client

TNMS CT Server
component

LAN
hiT 7500
hiT 7300

hiT 70xx

hiT 70xx

STM-16
BSHR/4

STM-16
BSHR/4
hiT 70xx

hiT 70xx

hiT 70xx

MSP 1+1

hiT 70xx

MSP 1+1

Fig. 7 TNMS CT: Client/Server architecture

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

13

Operating terminal

2.2.2

LCT and NCT modes

Depending on the needs, two different modes are available for TNMS CT.
LCT Mode:
The Local Craft Terminal (LCT) is used for local management and commissioning of
network elements. The LCT can communicate with a maximum of 50 network
elements. Up to three element managers may be open at the same time only.
NCT Mode:
The Network Craft Terminal (NCT) is used for local or remote management of
network elements. In addition to the LCT functions, the monitoring of all the alarms
reported from each accessible network element is allowed. The NCT can
communicate with a maximum of 150 network elements (including alarm monitoring).
Up to 50 element managers may be open at the same time only.
TIP
Each mode requires its own license key. Furthermore, the installation routines are
slightly different from each other.

WARNING
Some NEs, such as QST and QD2 NEs, allow the connection to several
management system levels. If a management system like TNMS Core enforces write
access on a network element, it will override the TNMS CT write access.

14

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

TNMS CT: LCT and NCT modes


The NCT mode supports the daily work of a service
technician in a software tool optimized way
Supports of up to 150 NEs at the same time
without restriction of the Network topology complexity
Max. 50 open element managers at the same time
Local or remote Client login capability is supported
Network Alarm list or Network Alarm logs are supported

The LCT mode provides the service


technician with a basic function access
to the network element (NOT SUPPORTED
BY hiT 7080 !)

NCT

Network interface
(Ethernet)

Supports of up to 50 NEs at the same time


without restriction of the Network
topology complexity
Max. 3 open element managers at the same time
Elementary requirements for NE commissioning
One Client and one Server on the same PC

Metro-Access
STM-1/4/16

LCT
Serial line interface
(RS232) or Ethernet

Fig. 8 LCT and NCT modes

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

15

Operating terminal

2.2.3

Graphical user interface

The TNMS CT specific software package allows the creation of a graphical

representation of the network such as a geographical arrangement of the NE


symbols as an example.

Each NE is represented on the GUI by an individual icon.


The NE specific Element Manager can be activated via mouse click on the NE
symbol.

It is possible to open more than one Element Manager Application at the same
time.

Program control and command entry can be performed by means of the mouse

and / or keyboard using pull down menus and the deposition of popup menus,
activated via right mouse button click.

All menus and actions, which can be activated via popup menu, are also
selectable via pull down menu titles.

Menu titles and menu options, which are frequently used, can also be selected via
function keys.

The operator is guided through the program by menus. One has no need to learn
complex command syntax. Furthermore the program offers mechanisms as filtering
or sorting of information and offers support through help functions.

16

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

Graphical User Interface (GUI)

Fig. 9 TNMS CT GUI

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

17

Operating terminal

18

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

Getting started
LCT

LCT
NCT

T
SC
TNM

Fig. 10

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

19

Operating terminal

3.1
3.1.1

What you need to navigate


Starting TNMS CT server

TNMS CT Server is started automatically on system startup, before any user is


logged on. Once it has been started, a connection to all configured and activated
network elements is established and their data is uploaded. An icon is displayed in
the Windows 2000/XP taskbar. Once the Server has started, it is always active.
Moreover, terminating the Client does not result in stopping the Server and
disconnecting from the NEs.

3.1.2

Starting a TNMS CT client session

Once the TNMS CT Server has been started, TNMS CT Client can be started from
the Computers Desktop:
1.

From "Start" menu

or
2.

using the "CT Client" icon.

3.1.3

Working with the mouse

Both the left and the right mouse button are used when working with the GUI. The left
mouse button (LMB) may be used for the following actions:

Select a context menu from the top bar of a window.


Select a menu item.
Select a function using the features available in a window (buttons, selection
menus etc.).

Confirm an action (e.g. Apply).


A great number of operations within both interfaces can only be invoked via context
menus. A context menu is called by clicking an object of the graphical user interface
with the right mouse button (RMB). This displays a selection of menu items which are
relevant for the selected object in the given situation.

20

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

Starting a TNMS CT client session

TNMS CT Server
Is running

Fig. 11 Starting a TNMS CT client session

3.1.4

Working with the keyboard

The TNMS CT user interface is driven by context menus (click on objects in the
user interface with the right mouse button) and therefore cannot be operated without
a mouse. Therefore this manual refers throughout to mouse control. However, it is
possible to use the keyboard to perform the actions listed in the main menus. Hold
down the <Alt> key and press the underlined letters for the menu items you want to
use. For example:
Main window Fault menu Alarm List... entry = <Alt>+<A>, <L>.
If there are no underlined letters visible, please press <Alt>. To open a context menu
you can also use <Shift>+<F10>.
By using the <TAB> key it is possible to jump between the different window panels.
In the remaining chapters of this manual it is presumed that the operator works with a
mouse.

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

21

Operating terminal

3.1.5

Login procedure of TNMS CT client

TIP
Before you can obtain the user access to the TNMS CT Client the related TNMS
CT server has to be started.
Login as follows:
(Use the tabulator key to toggle between the fields in the Login dialog field.)

Enter the name or the IP address of the TNMS CT server.


By default the name of the TNMS CT server, at which the last login took place,
will be displayed.
TIP
When the TNMS CT server, at which you want to log on, is on the local system, the
server-name is 'localhost'.

Enter a valid user name and password. By default the name of the last logged on
user is displayed. Your TNMS administrator gives you your user name and
password.

TIP
When entering the user name details please distinguish between the upper and lower
case letters! To protect your password, it is displayed asterisks (*) while you are
entering it.

Click on 'Login' button or press the enter key.


In case the Advisory window is displayed, please confirm the advisory message
with "OK".

You will be logged on.


Advisory window
The Advisory window consists of company specific message for the employed
operators displayed at login.
The window has its own toolbar:

Click "OK" to confirm the message.


Click "Cancel" to exit the Advisory window and abort the login.
The following information is provided in this window:

"Last Login" Displays the date and time of the operator's last login.
"Advisory Message" Displays a message to be configured under Security
Settings window.

22

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

Login procedure

Fig. 12 Login procedure

Advisory Window

Fig. 13 Advisory Window

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

23

Operating terminal

3.1.6

TNMS CT client: main window

The TNMS CT GUI gives access to all functions for supervision, operation,
configuration and maintenance of the network. The set of functions available to each
individual operator depends on the operators user class that is defined by the
administrator.
Via the TNMS CT GUI you can also start the element manager applications (e.g.
the EM of an SMA16/4 or the MSN Manager) to control and configure individual
network elements.
The TNMS Client user interface consists of the following parts:
1. Menu bar:
Menu bar of the TNMS CT main window contains the number of the menu items.
When you click on one of these menu items, the pull down menu specific to the
menu item opens.
2. Toolbar:
The toolbar runs along the top edge of the main window above the working area.
Clicking on one of these buttons with the left mouse button provides quick and
particularly easy access to certain frequently used functions.
3. Status bar:
The status bar runs along the bottom of the main window. It gives information on
the operating states and displays important messages, such as alarms, in short
form.

24

Notification Area

A short help text for the currently selected window, menu entry
or toolbar button.

Operator

User ID of the currently logged in operator.

Server Name

Name of the connected Server.

Server State

State of the TNMS CT Server, i.e. idle, starting up, shutting


down or running.

Time

Time display, i.e. local, GMT or CST.

Alarms

Alarm severities and counters for each severity, i.e.


indeterminate, critical, major, minor, warning (from left to right)

SSL

Secure connection to the server is established.

Data Semaphore

Open transactions, i.e. no open transactions (green), open


transactions (red).

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

TNMS CT Client: Main Window


1
2
4

Server Name
Notification
area

Operator

SSL

Server State

Time

Alarms

Data
Semaphore

Fig. 14 TNMS CT client: main window

4. Network View:
The Network View provides graphical representation of your network. Orientation
within the Network View can be improved by using a background bitmap. For
example, you can attach the picture of a city map to be displayed in the
background of the network plan and position your network elements in this map
according to their real location. Moreover, the Network View offers quick access to
information concerning single NEs (e.g. current access state, alarm state). Each
item of the Network View offers an individual context menu.
5. Working Area:
This is the main area where the operator can arrange the individual work place.

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

25

Operating terminal

3.1.7

Representation of the network

The "Network View" contains the TNMS CT network map. On the network map the
network elements can be placed according to the network topology with the help of a
background bitmap. Additionally, links can be drawn between the NEs and port
connections can be set up.
The network element icon is used to indicate the type of the network element.
Different states of the network element are shown by the extra symbols of the
network element icon.
A network element in the maintenance mode does not send notifications. This state
will be indicated with a wrench symbol on the network element icon.
In addition to the display of the network element states the NE icon is also used to
show the alarm status and alarm severity of the received alarms.

26

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

Network Element states


Icon

Write Access

NE in the
maintenance
mode.

Graphical
presentation
of the active
alarm(s).

unknown
no write access
external management system/LCT
NEC
EM of this TNMS CT

Port
connection.

EM of this TNMS CT and NEC


Icon

Operational
State

Access State

enabled

ready

disabled

ready

unknown

disconnected

unknown

failure

unknown

starting up

unknown

shutting down

unknown

The NE is deactivated in the DCN Management.

init failed

The NE has not finished its initialisation successfully and is


inoperable. It is only possible to reinitialize the data via TNMS CT.

Operational
status is
disabled.

Fig. 15 Representation of the network and network element states

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

27

Operating terminal

3.2
3.2.1

Basic operations
Starting Element Manager Applications

The element manager applications are started via the TNMS CT "Network View"
window. A data connection is established to the relevant NE which allows the user to
execute required functions directly at the NE. Element Manager Applications provide
a set of functions for provisioning and reconfiguring a network element (NE). The
different configuration data, such as cross connections, alarm filters (e.g. suppression
of Alarms), performance thresholds and synchronization features will be inserted in
tables or graphical views, depending from the NE, that shall be configured.
To start Element Manager Application:
1. Right mouse click on the NE symbol.
2. From the opened context menu "Start Element Manager" menu (LMB) has to be
selected.
3. Element Manager Application is started and NE "Chassis View" window is
opened.
The other way to start the Element Manager application, is just clicking twice over the
NE symbol and wait until the "Chassis View" of the NE open.

28

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

Fig. 16 Starting the element manager

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

29

Operating terminal

3.2.2

Background bitmap

Orientation within the Network View can be improved by using a background bitmap.
For example, there is possible to attach a picture of a city map to be displayed in the
background of the network plan and position your network elements in this map
according to their real location.
To add a new background bitmap for the Network View:
1. Right mouse click on the "Network View" window and from the opened context
menu select "Background"
2. In the "Background" window tick on the check box "None" and than press
"Brows" button.
3. In the "Browse for Background Map" window select the background bitmap to
be used and than press "Open" button.
4. To apply modifications press (LMB) "OK" button.

3.2.3

Network element properties

To display properties of the Network Element:


1. Select (RMB) network element icon, properties to be displayed
2. From opened Pull Down menu select "Properties".
3. "Properties" window is displayed.

30

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

3
2

Fig. 17 Adding a background bitmap

1
3
2

Fig. 18 Network element properties

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

31

Operating terminal

3.2.4
3.2.4.1

Network topology management


Links

To show connections between network elements the graphical links can be drawn.
You can configure up to four lines for each link. To configure a line, complete the
following steps:
4. Right mouse click on the symbol of the first NE, and from opened context menu
select "Links"
5. Drag and Drop the second NE from the "Network View" window.
6. Select the style and color of the link. To delete a link select "None"
7. To confirm settings press "Apply" button.

3.2.4.2

Port connections (not supported by hiT 7080)

A port connection represents a physical connection between two Ports of two


different network elements. Creating a port connection object in TNMS CT means
only to create a presentation for this physical wire at TNMS CT. The only
precondition for the creation of a port connection at TNMS CT is, that the network
elements and the ports of the network elements at both ends of the port connection
are supported by TNMS CT.
In order to create a port connection, complete the following steps:
1. Select (RMB) the source NE and from the opened context menu "Port
Connections".
2. "Port Connections" window is opened and all ports of this NE are now displayed
there.
3. Select the destination NE and drag it into the right area. In case of an internal
port connection, simply drop the same NE here. All ports of this NE are now
displayed there.
4. Select one source and sink port on each side. If they are matching, the
Connection buttons in the toolbar are activated. You can use a filter function to
limit the displayed port connections.
5. Press one of the Connection buttons in the toolbar to create a port connection.
One or more arrows between the previously selected ports indicate the created
port connection. The created port connection will be highlighted.

32

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

1
2

Fig. 19 Creating a link

5
4

1
2

Fig. 20 Creating a port connection

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

33

Operating terminal

Port connection list


The Port Connection List displays automatically updated information about all
existing port connections.
To get a "Port Connection List":
1. From the "Main Menu" of the "Main Window" select "View -> Port Connection
List...".
2. "Port Connection List" is opened.
3. By right-clicking in the list, you can activate a context menu.

Delete port connection


In order to delete a port connection, complete the following steps:
1. In the opened "Port Connections List" window select (RMB) port connection to
be deleted.
2. From Pull Down menu select "Edit Port Connection...". "Port Connection"
window is opened.
3. In the "Port Connection" window related port connection will be highlighted and
between the ports arrows represent the connection.
4. Press the "Disconnect" button to delete the port connection.
The deleted port connection also disappears from the Network View if it there are not
any more port connections between the same NEs.

34

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

Fig. 21 Port connection list

2
3

Fig. 22 Delete port connection

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

35

Operating terminal

3.2.5

Administrating NE Write Access

TNMS CT only administers write access to managed network elements which


support this feature via the context menu of the NE icon on the network map.
Typically the TNMS C is the Network Management station which has the "Write
Access" to the NE. It has a higher priority than a TNMS CT. That means TNMS C
has to release "Write Access" to a NE before it can be requested by TNMS CT.
TNMS C also has the capability to enforce "Write Access" to a NE at any time.
Consequently, the TNMS CT operator also has quite limited control over external
LCT write access.
You can administer the NE write access via:
Network View NE context menu Access Control menu item
Release Write Access
Allow other LCTs to get write access on the selected NE
Request Write Access
Get write access on the selected NE unless any other LCT or TNMS C has write
access on it

3.2.6

Resynchronize Data

Sometimes SNMP controlled NEs (like hiT7080) cannot forward the complete data to
the TNMS CT. To be sure that you have the latest status updates and alarms
available at the Graphical User Interface you can start a new NEC initialization for the
selected network element via:
Network View NE context menu Resynchronize Data

36

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

TNMS-CT
A

TNMS-CT
B

Fig. 23 Administrating NE Write Access

Fig. 24 Resynchronize Data

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

37

Operating terminal

3.2.7

Requesting the alarm information

The alarms detected inside a manageable network will be reported by the NE's as
alarm messages to the TNMS CT. To view and process the current and historical
alarms massages the "Alarm List" and "Alarm Log" files can be displayed.
Alarm list
A complete list of currently raised alarms or list of the alarms related to a selected
object can be opened via the following menu entries:
1. From the "Main Menu" select "Fault Alarm List...".
or
2. From "Network View" from NE context menu select "Alarm Alarm List...".
3. By clicking (RMB) into an alarm entry you can open a popup menu. Choose
(LMB) "Filter" entry to open the "Filter settings" window. Here you can set your
Filter configuration to filter the entries in the alarm list according to your
requirements.
Alarm Log
A complete historical alarm list or historical alarm list related to a selected object can
be opened via the following menu entries:
1. From the "Main Menu" select "Fault Alarm Log...".
or
2. From "Network View" from NE context menu select "Alarm Alarm Log...".
3. By clicking (RMB) into an alarm entry you can open a popup menu. Choose
(LMB) "Filter" entry to open the "Filter settings" window. Here you can set
your Filter configuration to filter the entries in the alarm log according to your
requirements.

38

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

Fig. 25 Requesting alarm list

Fig. 26 Requesting alarm log

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

39

Operating terminal

Alarm statistic window


The Alarm Statistic window displays the alarm statistics for the selected network
element. For each severity a counter for acknowledged alarms (Ack) and for
unacknowledged alarms (Unack) is displayed.
The right column shows a summary of both acknowledged and unacknowledged
alarms for each alarm severity. The bottom line shows a summary of all
acknowledged alarms, unacknowledged alarms and the total for both categories. The
alarm severity is not taken into account here.
The alarm statistics correspond to the Alarm List with a filter for the network element
in question.

Fig. 27 Alarm statistic window

40

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

3.2.8

Terminating a TNMS CT session

A TNMS CT session is terminated when the user logs off. All windows are closed
and access is only provided to the login function. The TNMS CT Server process will
not be stopped.
1. To terminate TNMS CT user session press "Logoff" button.
2. To confirm the logoff, in the opened "Message" window press "OK" button.

Fig. 28 Terminating a TNMS CT session

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

41

Operating terminal

3.3

Connecting to the Network Element

There are two ways of connecting to the SURPASS hiT 70xx series network
elements these are either TNMS CT or CLI (Command Line Interface)
TNMS CT
TNMS CT provides the user with a purpose built graphical user interface in which
operators can monitor and configure a selected network element. Each different type
of Network Element has a specially built Element Manager application that must be
installed with TNMS CT. Additionally corresponding License Keys needs to be
imported into the TNMS CT SW to enable functionality. Connection is established
by connecting the network interface on the TNMS CT PC to the management
interface on the network element directly or via a L2 switch using an Ethernet patch
cable.
The operator is required to configure IP setting on the TNMS CT PC based on the
settings within the network element before communication can be established. This is
done within windows and not the TNMS CT software.
Alternatively TNMS CT can connect to a NE also via a routed network. IP settings
on the TNMS CT PC must be done appropriate dependent on the local
environment.
Using an existing Data Communication Network DCN an operator can connect either
to the local NE or to a remote NE.
TIP
DCN setup is also required as a prerequisite at the TNMS CT. This is typically a
task the network administrator takes care of.
CLI (Command Line Interface)
Unlike TNMS CT the CLI access does not require any special software to be
loaded onto an operator's machine. The operator can use Hyper Terminal which
comes standard with Microsoft Windows or any similar program. The operator does
not have to know any IP settings to establish a connection to a NE.
Connection is established by connecting a straight serial cable between the Com Port
on a PC and the Console Port on the network element.
CLI will provide the operator with a menu operated system which will allows them to
view and configure communications settings for the NE. The operator can
communicate with the local network element or remotely communicate with a network
element using a telnet program instead of Hyper Terminal.

42

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

CLI and TNMS-CT


TNMS-CT
Client

WAN / Internet
WAN / Internet
TNMS-CT
Server

TNMS-CT

LAN

CLI
TNMS-CT

RS232

RS232

CLI

hiT 7080

hiT 7080

STM-16
BSHR/2

STM-64
hiT 70xx

hiT 70xx

MSP 1+1

hiT 7080

MSP 1+1

hiT 7080

Fig. 29 CLI and TNMS-M LCT

Connectivity to NEs
Element management functions are executed via the element
managers (LCTs) provided by the TNMS-CT system

TNMS-CT

The
The Console
Console or
or CLI
CLI mode
mode provides
provides the
the
service
service technician
technician with
with aa basic
basic
communications
communications settings
settings access
access to
to
the
the network
network element
element
Support
Support for
for 11 NE
NE at
at aa time
time
No
No special
special software
software required
required to
to connect.
connect.
Can
Can remote
remote telnet
telnet to
to neighboring
neighboring NEs
NEs
when
when no
no routing
routing protocol
protocol established
established

Network interface
(Ethernet)

Metro-Access
STM-1/4/16

CLI
Serial line interface
(RS232)

Fig. 30 Connectivity to NEs

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

43

Operating terminal

3.3.1

CLI / console access

To establish a connection to the network element using the CLI method:


1. Connect Cable between the Com Port (E.g. COM1) on PC and the Console Port
on Network Element. The Console port can be found on the System Controller
(SC) faceplate for SURPASS hiT 7080.
2. Start the Hyper Terminal (or similar) program.
Hyper Terminal can be found by selecting Start Programs Accessories
Communications Hyper Terminal
3. Give the Hyper Terminal session a name to save configuring the settings next
time it is used.
TIP
The same Terminal Settings are used for all the SURPASS hiT Products (7080, 7060
HC, 7060, 7030, 7035, 7025, 7020).
4. In the "Connect to" pop up window select the serial communication port which
you are going to use for your serial line communication (e.g. COM1) and hit the
"OK" button.
5. Configure the selected serial port with the following settings.
Bit Rate

9600

Data Bits

Parity

None

Stop Bits

Flow Control

None

TIP
For this step, just press the "Restore Defaults" button.
6. Again hit the "OK" button.

44

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

Fig. 31 Creating a hyper terminal session

Fig. 32 Define serial port communication settings

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

45

Operating terminal

HyperTerminal: CLI Login


1. Press ENTER twice to refresh the login screen of the network element
2. Enter the User name and password
The Default settings are
User Name

Password

Access Level

root

<blank>

Administrator

op

<blank>

Operator

3. The Main Menu is displayed. A user can press any of the letters (displayed in
brackets) to select that item.

46

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

7
6

Fig. 33 Hyper terminal: CLI Login

Fig. 34 Main menu display

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

47

Operating terminal

3.3.1.1

Configuring TNMS CT IP settings

Prior to starting to communicate with a network element, the TNMS CT IP Address


must be configured.
You must know the following information.

An available IP address in the Management Port IP Subnet for TNMS CT


Management Port Subnet Mask
Management Port IP Address
This Information can be obtained by using the CLI connection.
The information above assumes that the connection is going to be established via a
L2 Switch, Hub or Ethernet Cross over cable but not a router. If connecting via a
router the operator will have to consult with the Network Administrator to obtain the
required address information. See Fig. 35 and Fig. 36 for examples.

48

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

TNMS CT: Local Connection


Node IP Address: 172.16.8.61
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.255

TNMS-CT
Network: 10.10.6.0/28
Network: 10.10.6.0/28
L2 Switch

IP Address: 10.10.6.11
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.240
Default Gateway: 10.10.6.10

Management Port IP Address: 10.10.6.10


Management Port Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.240
Default Gateway: X.X.X.X

Fig. 35 TNMS CT: Local Connection

TNMS CT: Connection via Router


IP: 10.10.5.161
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway: 10.10.5.254

IP: 10.10.6.1
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.240

Node IP: 172.16.8.61


Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.255

TNMS-CT
Network:
Network:
10.10.5.0/24
10.10.5.0/24

Network: 10.10.6.0/28
Network: 10.10.6.0/28
Router

IP: 10.10.5.254
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0

L2 Switch

Management Port IP: 10.10.6.10


Management Port Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.240
Default Gateway: 10.10.6.1

Fig. 36 TNMS CT: Connection via Router

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

49

Operating terminal

TNMS CT: IP Address configuration


1. Either Right Mouse Click on My Network Places and select Properties or
Select Network connections from Start Settings Network Connections
2. Right Click on your network interface and select Properties
3. Select Internet Protocol (TCP / IP) and press Properties
4. Select Use the following IP address and fill in the IP settings as listed below
IP Address: Must be in the same subnet as Management Port IP Address but not
the same as any other IP address. Consider the Subnet Mask value!.
Subnet Mask: Must be the same as Management Port Subnet Mask.
Default Gateway: Must be the same as Management Port IP Address.
5. Click OK to apply these settings. Configuration complete.
TIP
To check connectivity between the LCT and the Network Element try pinging the
Management Port IP Address and the Node IP Address.

50

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

Fig. 37 IP settings

Fig. 38 IP settings

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

51

Operating terminal

52

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

Exercises

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

53

Operating terminal

54

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operating terminal

Exercise
Title:
CLI and TNMS CT Connection

Objectives:
The participant is able to setup a connection to the NE using CLI and TNMS CT

Pre-requisite:
TNMS CT and HyperTerminal installed.

Task
Ask the instructor which is the element assigned to your team.
Using the HyperTerminal establish a serial connection with the element assigned to
your team and write down the data you find out

NE Type

NE IP Address

MGMT IP Address

MGMT Net Mask

Using the data from the table, configure the Ethernet card on your TNMS CT PC
and connect to the NE assigned using TNMS CT LCT.

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

55

Operating terminal

56

FT52424EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Operation: Traffic Setup

Contents
1
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
4

hiT 7080 LCT GUI


SDH cards and ports configuration
Configuring a new card
Delete a card
NE / Card / Port Properties Configuration
Cross connections configuration
Cross connections principles
Types of cross connections
Timeslot numbering
Cross connection management
NE Resource Usage Statistics
Exercise

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

3
7
8
10
14
21
22
24
26
28
62
65

Operation: Traffic Setup

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

hiT 7080 LCT GUI

RACK

Cross
Connect
Tools

Ethernet
SN64
Level
2
OIS16D

LCT
hiT 7080
2Mb

CL

7020
System

DOC
Training
Doc

Fan

Nokia
Siemens
Networks

Fig. 1

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Once the TNMS CT Network Element management (hiT7080 LCT) program has
successfully loaded the operator is presented with the Main operation window. This
consists of:

Title and Main Menu Bar.


Alarm Summary.
Chassis View.
The Chassis View window gives a graphical representation of the subrack. It details
card and slot information such as:

Name of card.
Display any configurable ports that may be on the card.
List the Card operation state.
List the Port operation state.
It is possible to configure and identify faults in the equipment by using various
different menus.
Main Menu
The main menu lists general functions that are not related to one specific card or
port. Some examples are Protection, Communications, Performance monitoring
Context menus
By right clicking a certain component of the chassis, the specific context menu
opens. There are three levels for context menus:

Chassis Menu
Via the chassis menu NE specific operations may be carried out. Examples are:
Verify NE properties or Refresh Chassis

Card Menus
The Card menu lists items that are specific to the selected card. An example is
creating cross connections from the Cross connection card

Port Menus
The Port menu lists items that are specific to the selected port. An Example is Port
configuration which allows configuring laser shut down.
TIP
Items in the context menu change based on which component is selected in the
chassis view.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

LCT Main Menu


Chassis Main Menu
Context Menu

Physical port on
card
Card Operational
State

Card description
Alarm summary

Fig. 2 hiT7080 LCT GUI description

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Operation: Traffic Setup

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

SDH cards and ports configuration

Fig. 3 Second row for SDH/PDH cards

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

2.1

Configuring a new card

The SURPASS hiT 7080 Network Elements have a built in plug and play feature
whereby the system controller automatically configures a new card when it is inserted
into the sub-rack. There is no manual configuration of cards available. During the
configuration of the new card, the card will be displayed into the slot and the card
status "Initializing" is displayed at the bottom of the card in the LCT window. Once
the configuration has been successfully completed, the card status is changed to
"Active". Fig. 4 shows Slot 4 during the initialization phase.
The alarms for all the ports of the newly configured card will not be supervised nor
displayed until a signal is applied to the relevant port.
The possible card statuses are:

Initializing: the hardware / software of the card is being initialized (after being
inserted into the chassis or while a cold reboot is taking place).

Active: the card has been recognized by the system and it is working properly.
Operational: the same meaning as Active. This status shows only up on core

cards with redundancy option (switch matrix). In case of both of the cards are
equipped, the one in the working status will also show an "Active" status while the
protection one will show "Standby" (Temporary note: This state is not displayed in
hiT 7080; just Active/STBY).

Faulty: the card is not working. An internal failure has been detected.
Mismatch: this label will be appear in case of equipping a card not supported on
the chassis (the card type is not the expected one; e.g. after card replacement
another card type is inserted into slot without having deleted the old one
administratively).

Absent: the card has been removed from shelf or there is a cold reboot ongoing.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Fig. 4 Card initialization

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Operation: Traffic Setup

2.2

Delete a card

Prior to deleting a card from the sub rack the following preconditions must be
fulfilled.

Removal of all traffic cross-connections related with the card.


Removal of card / ports from protection schemes.
Removal of related ports from synchronization sources list.
Physical removal of the card from sub rack.
The following slides demonstrate the removal of an SDH card from Slot 4.
1. Fig. 5 shows the card operating normally "Active" in the sub rack. The
operator should check that all preconditions have been fulfilled prior to perform
the physical removal of the card.
2. Card should be physically removed from the sub rack. The LCT will display
"Absent" in red color at the bottom of the card once it has been physically
removed.

10

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Fig. 5 Normal card state operation

Fig. 6 Card physically removed from sub-rack

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

11

Operation: Traffic Setup

3. Right mouse click on the card showing the "Absent" status and select the
"Delete Card" option on the pop-up menu.
Note that the "Delete Card" option is only available in the pop up menu when the
card has been physically removed from the sub rack.
4. Click the "OK" button to confirm the deletion of the card.
5. A "Card has been deleted successfully" message will be displayed once the
system has done it. Once more click the "OK" button to confirm.

12

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Fig. 7 Deleting a Card

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

13

Operation: Traffic Setup

2.3

NE / Card / Port Properties Configuration

To configure or view the NE / card / port properties carry out the following steps:
1. Open the Chassis context menu and select "NE Property Configuration".
2. The "NE Property Configuration" window will open. Most of the configurable
parameters displayed in this window are set at time of commissioning and should
not be changed without good reason.
3. Double click in one of the desire card displayed in the Card List.
4. The corresponding "Card Property Configuration" window will open.
TIP
The content of the "Card Property Configuration" window will vary depending on
the selected card type
5. It is possible to configure some of the parameters in this window, like "Card
Label" or "Card Description" which contain descriptive text about the card.
6. Click either the "Apply" or "OK" button. The "Apply" button will keep the "Card
Property Configuration" window open. The "OK" button will close the "Card
Property Configuration" window.
7. In the lower half of the window the "Port List" is displayed. From here there is
possible to get an overview about the most important port parameters.

14

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Fig. 8 Open NE / Card Properties window

5
3

6
3

Fig. 9 Open NE / Card Properties window

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

15

Operation: Traffic Setup

8. To view or configure port parameters double click the respective entry in the
Port List.
9. The corresponding "Port Property Configuration" window will open.
TIP
The content of the "Port Property Configuration" window will vary depending on
the selected port type.
10. It is possible to configure some of the parameters in this window, like :

Port Label: contains descriptive text about the port


Port Mode: can be set to
Auto Mode: if the LOS defect clears or does not exist, the port mode is
automatically changed to Monitor; if the LOS defect keeps existing, the mode also
stays as Auto mode and the port mode performs the same function as the Non
Monitor mode.
Monitor: port supervision is enabled.
Non-monitor: port supervision is disabled.

Port Admin Mode: can be set to


Enabled: administratively enabled (Up); on optical port needs to be enabled to
restart the Laser.
Disabled: administratively disabled (Down); at optical port also the Laser will be
shut down.

Auto Laser Shutdown: can be set to


Yes: administratively enable Automatic Laser Shutdown mechanism for this port.
No: administratively disable Automatic Laser Shutdown mechanism for this port.

Port ALS Mode: can be set to


No Command: if ALS is administratively enabled Automatic Laser Restart
mechanism will take place for this port.
Manual Restart: if ALS is administratively enabled a Laser Restart pulse with a
duration of 2 seconds will be sent
Manual Test: if ALS is administratively enabled a Laser Test pulse with a duration
of 90 +/- 10 seconds will be sent

Working Mode: only available for 8 x STM-4/-1 and can be set to


STM-4: this port operates at 622 Mbps
STM-1: this port operates at 155 Mbps
11. Click the "Apply" button to activate all the changes.

16

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

10

11
10

Fig. 10 Port Properties Configuration window

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

17

Operation: Traffic Setup

12. In the lower half of the window the "Port status" is displayed. From here you can
obtain information about the current port status and most important monitoring
parameters of optical SFP/XFP modules.
13. Additional SFP/XFP specific information can be displayed. Click the "Advanced
button". An information window will pop up.
14. Click the "OK" button to confirm.
15. The "Advanced Port Status Information" window will pop up.
TIP
The content of the Advanced Port Status Information window will vary depending on
the selected SFP/XFP type.

18

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

14

15

13

12

Fig. 11 Advanced Port Status Information window

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

19

Operation: Traffic Setup

20

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Cross connections configuration


SN64

Fig. 12 Cross-connections

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

21

Operation: Traffic Setup

3.1

Cross connections principles

In order to connect internally signals on different interface modules cross


connections have to be configured. These connections are initiated by software
command and allow easy configuration, reconfiguration or deletion.
The number and possible types of cross connections depends on the switching
capacity of the NE.
Generally, cross connections can be created between:

Line interface and line interface.


Line interface and tributary interface.
Tributary interface and tributary interface.

22

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Cross-connection overview

SWITCHING MATRIX(S)
Line to line
connection

Line

Trib

Trib

Trib

Line

Trib

Line to tributary
connection
Tributary to tributary
connection

Fig. 13 Cross connection principles

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

23

Operation: Traffic Setup

3.2

Types of cross connections

The cross connections are established with the aid of "Termination Points" TP. As
an example, a TP could be a VC-4 on an ETH interface (TTP) or a VC-4 on a SDH
interface (CTP). Each termination point characterizes the source TP A or the sink TP
Z of the connection. There are four different types of cross connections that can be
set up:

Unidirectional cross connection:


In a unidirectional cross connection, unidirectional termination points are linked
together. Traffic flows from TP A (source) to TP Z (sink). The other direction
remains unused

Bi directional cross connection:


In a bi directional cross connection, bi directional termination points are
linked together. Traffic flows from TP A to TP Z and vice versa.

Loop back cross connection:


In a loop back cross connection, the source and the sink of the termination point
are linked in a loop. (TP A and TP Z are the same termination point)

Broadcast cross connection:


A broadcast cross connection is a special arrangement of a number of
unidirectional cross connections that have the same "source" termination point.
In that sense, there are several different TP Z linked with the same TP A.
Broadcast cross connections are only possible without protection.

24

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Cross-connection types
Bidirectional
cross connection

SWITCHING MATRIX(S)

Line

Trib

Trib

Trib

Line

Trib

Unidirectional
cross connection
Broadcast
cross connection

Loopback
cross connection

Fig. 14 Cross connection types

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

25

Operation: Traffic Setup

3.3

Timeslot numbering

Over time three different numbering systems have been developed and used to refer
to different virtual containers within a STM signal. The 3 most popular ones are Time
Slot Numbering, Tributary Numbering and KLM numbering.
Timeslot Numbering is a number between 1 and 63 representing the physical order in
which the VC-12 are multiplexed within a VC-4.
Tributary Numbering is a number between 1 and 63 representing the "logical" order
(according to G.707 mapping) the VC-12 containers are mapped into a VC-4, it's a
graphical order instead a physical one.
K,L,M numbering gives the VC-12 location, related to a TU-3, TU-2, TU-12 within a
VC-4.
Different equipment use different numbering systems to number the VC-12
containers within a VC-4.
Tributary Numbering is used in a SMA Release 1, SMA Release 2, SMA1-K, TNMS.
K,L,M Numbering is used in SMA Series 4, SURPASS hiT 7070, 7050.
The SURPASS hiT 7080 can use either the Tributary Numbering or the K,L,M
numbering.
WARNING
When interworking between different SDH equipment, it should be made clear
which numbering system is being used, to ensure signals are connected
correctly.

26

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1

VC4 Column
Number

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Time Slot

1 22 43 4 25 46 7 28 49 10 31 52 13 34 55 16 37 58 19 40 61

Tributary

4
P
O

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

VC4 Column
Number

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42

Time Slot

2 23 44 5 26 47 8 29 50 11 32 53 14 35 56 17 38 59 20 41 62

Tributary
K

50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70

VC4 Column
Number

43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63

Time Slot

3 24 45 6 27 48 9 30 51 12 33 54 15 36 57 18 39 60 21 42 63

Tributary
K

Fig. 15 TU-12's physical position in a VC-4

TUG3 #1
TUG2 #1

TUG2 #2

TUG2 #3

TUG2 #4

TUG2 #5

TUG2 #6

TUG2#7

TUG3 #2

TUG3#3

22

43

23

44

24

45

1
(1,1,1)

2
(1,1,2)

3
(1,1,3)

22
(2,1,1)

23
(2,1,2)

24
(2,1,3)

43
(3,1,1)

44
(3,1,2)

45
(3,1,3)

25

46

26

47

27

48

4
(1,2,1)

5
(1,2,2)

6
(1,2,3)

25
(2,2,1)

26
(2,2,2)

27
(2,2,3)

46
(3,2,1)

47
(3,2,2)

48
(3,2,3)

28

49

29

50

30

51

7
(1,3,1)

8
(1,3,2)

9
(1,3,3)

28
(2,3,1)

29
(2,3,2)

30
(2,3,3)

49
(3,3,1)

50
(3,3,2)

51
(3,3,3)

10

31

52

11

32

53

12

33

54

10
(1,4,1)

11
(1,4,2)

12
(1,4,3)

31
(2,4,1)

32
(2,4,2)

33
(2,4,3)

52
(3,4,1)

53
(3,4,2)

54
(3,4,3)

13

34

55

14

35

56

15

36

57

13
(1,5,1)

14
(1,5,2)

15
(1,5,3)

34
(2,5,1)

35
(2,5,2)

36
(2,5,3)

55
(3,5,1)

56
(3,5,2)

57
(3,5,3)

16

37

58

17

38

59

18

39

60

16
(1,6,1)

17
(1,6,2)

18
(1,6,3)

37
(2,6,1)

38
(2,6,2)

39
(2,6,3)

58
(3,6,1)

59
(3,6,2)

60
(3,6,3)

19

40

61

20

41

62

21

42

63

19
(1,7,1)

20
(1,7,2)

21
(1,7,3)

40
(2,7,1)

41
(2,7,2)

42
(2,7,3)

61
(3,7,1)

62
(3,7,2)

63
(3,7,3)

TU12 #1

TU12 #2

TU12 #3

TU12 #1

TU12 #2

TU12 #3

TU12 #1

TU12 #2

TU12#3

Code

Timeslot Number
Tributary Number
K, L, M Number

Example

53
33
(2,4,3)

Fig. 16 Timeslot, tributary and KLM numbering

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

27

Operation: Traffic Setup

3.4

Cross connection management

The procedure for configuring cross connections is identical for all switching levels.
Different level termination points are used, depending on the configuration of the
selected card.

3.4.1

Listing existing cross connection's (CC)

A list of all existing cross connections or a filtered list of them can be seen by:
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration Cross Connect
Management. A blank "Cross connect Management" screen will appear.
This screen is split into 2 areas, the top area (Conditional Settings) is a cross
connection filter, which allows to display just a specific cross connections
according with the selection.
2. Cross connections can be filtered based on Card, Port, Cross connection
level (Capacity), Direction, Circuit label or in which LOCC the cross
connections are stored. To filter the information set the desired filter.
3. Press the "Query" button at the bottom of the window to display the results of
the current filter. If the conditional settings remain untouched all cross
connections will be displayed
All cross connections in the SURPASS hiT 7080 have two (or more in case of
broadcast CC) termination points labeled A and Z. In the case of bi directional
cross connections the order in which they appear does not matter (traffic flows in
both directions). In case of unidirectional and broadcast cross connection, care has
to be taken in order to select as A point the signal source and as Z point the signal
destination (since in this case, traffic only flows from A to Z).
TIP
To view all cross connections in the NE, do not change any field into the
"Condition Settings" area and just click in "Query" button.

28

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

3
2

Fig. 17 Cross connections list: modify filter settings

Fig. 18 Cross connections list: filtered list

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

29

Operation: Traffic Setup

3.4.2

Preparing the multiplex structure

SURPASS hiT 7080 has a high order switch matrix which supports VC-4-64c, VC4-16c, VC-4-4c and VC-4 connections (note that virtual concatenated cross
connections are built as multiple connections) and has a low order switch matrix
which supports VC-3 and VC-12 connections. Even when all this CC levels are
supported, the default structure on all SDH interfaces is prepared to carry only
unstructured VC-4's.
If a non default payload structure is required within a STM-N signal, then the payload
structure has to be first configured manually on the interface. If this is not done, the
required CC can not be created. All modifications are made by selecting the menu
option Configuration TP multiplex structure.

3.4.2.1

Converting payload structure to AU-4-4c

This option is only available on STM-4, STM-16 and STM-64 cards.


1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration TP Multiplexing
Structure. The same option can be achieved, clicking with the right mouse
button over the desire port and select the option TP Multiplexing Structure.
2. This will bring up a popup box where the desired SDH card and port can be
selected.
3. Press the "Query" button to continue.
4. The "TP Multiplex Structure" popup window will expand to show the current
structure for the selected port. By right clicking on an item and selecting "Expand
All", the complete structure will be expanded. By pressing the "Plus" sign, only
the item next to the sign will be expanded.
TIP
If any container inside of the port (AU-4's, TU-3's or TU-12's) is used for a cross
connection or protection, the icon related to the container on the left side will have the
orange color and will use a pyramid as a icon, means is used. Balloon blue color
means, that the container are available for cross connections and can be used to
change the structure of the AU-4s. Finally the square icon and green color means
that the container is being used for MS-SPRing protection.
5. Select the required AUG-4 (Administrative Unit Group) to be modified into an
AU4-4c with the left mouse button.
6. Right click to display the menu. On the menu select "Mapping AUG-4 AUG-4
To AU-4-4c".

30

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

1
2

Fig. 19 Opening TP Multiplexing Structure windows

Fig. 20 Converting Structure to AU-4-4c I

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

31

Operation: Traffic Setup

WARNING
The Right Click menu will change based on the item currently highlighted.
7. Press the "Apply" button to modify the structure. An information box will indicate
the process is being applied.
8. Once the structure has been modified successfully a dialog box will show up.
Press the "OK" button to confirm.

32

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Structure not
applied yet

8
7
3

Fig. 21 Converting Structure to AU-4-4c II

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

33

Operation: Traffic Setup

3.4.2.2

Converting payload structure to AU-4 Clear Channel

This procedure has to be performed in order to convert a contiguously concatenated


VC-4-nc into a VC-4 structure. No cross connections should be present using the VC4-nc to be reconfigured. The following procedure shows how to un-structure a VC-44c:
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration TP Multiplexing
Structure.
2. This will bring up a popup box where the desired card and port can be selected.
3. Press the "Query" button to continue.
4. The TP Multiplex Structure popup box will expand to show the current structure
of the selected port. Right click on an item and select "Expand All" and it will
expand the complete structure. Press the plus sign to expand only the item next
to the plus sign.

34

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

1
2

Fig. 22 Opening TP Multiplexing Structure windows

5
6

Fig. 23 Converting Structure to AUG-1 I

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

35

Operation: Traffic Setup

5. Select the required AUG-4 (Administrative Unit Group) to be modified into AUG-1
structure.
6. Right click to display the menu. Select "Mapping AUG-4 AUG-4 To AUG-1".
7. Press the "Apply" button to modify the structure. An information window will pop
up to indicate the process is being applied. This takes some time.
8. Once the structure has been modified successfully a dialog box will show up.
Press the "OK" button to confirm.

36

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Structure not
applied yet

8
7

Fig. 24 Converting Structure to AUG-1 II

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

37

Operation: Traffic Setup

3.4.2.3

Converting payload structure to TU-12

The default payload structure for STM signals in the 7080 is not prepared for VC-12
connections. Before creating a VC-12 cross connection using that payload, the TU12 structure has to be prepared.
The procedures to structure the VC-4 into VC-12's are:
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration TP Multiplexing
Structure.
2. This will bring up a popup box where should be select the desire card and port.
3. Press the "Query" button to continue.
4. The TP Multiplex Structure popup box will expand to show the current structure
of the selected port. Right click on an item and select "Expand All" and it will
expand the complete structure. Press the plus sign to expand only the item next
to the plus sign.

38

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

1
2

Fig. 25 Payload structure to TU-12 I

5
6

Fig. 26 Payload structure to TU-12 II

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

39

Operation: Traffic Setup

5. Select the required AU-4 (Administrative Unit Group) to be modified with the left
mouse button.
6. Right mouse click to display the drop down menu. Select Mapping AU-4 AU-4
To TUG-3. Note the Structure will change to reflect the selected item.
WARNING
The Right Click menu will change based on what item is currently highlighted
(background color in blue) and not the item that may have been right clicked.

TIP
TUG-3 is a Tributary Unit Group Level 3. This means, it is a group of 7 TUG-2, each
of them consists of 3 TU-2 containers. It is not a TU-3 container for a 34/45Mb PDH
Signal
7. Press the "Apply" button to modify the structure. An information window will pop
up to indicate the process is being applied. This takes some time.
8. Once the structure has been modified successfully a dialog box will show up.
Press the "OK" button to confirm.

40

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Structure not
applied yet
8
7

Fig. 27 Payload structure to TU-12 II

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

41

Operation: Traffic Setup

3.4.2.4

Converting payload structure to TU-3

A TU-3 Structure can be mapped from a previously created TUG-3 container


consisting of TU-12 signals.
1. Select Configuration TP Multiplexing Structure.
2. This will bring up a popup box where the required SDH Card and Port to be
configured can be selected.
3. Press Query to Continue.
4. Select the TUG-3 to be modified with the left mouse button.
5. Right mouse click to display the menu.
Select Mapping TUG-3 TUG-3 To TU-3.
Note the Structure will change to reflect the selected item.

42

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

1
2

Fig. 28 Payload structure to TU-3 I

Structure not
applied yet

Fig. 29 Payload structure to TU-3 II

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

43

Operation: Traffic Setup

6. Press the Apply button to apply modification.


After pressing Apply an information box will indicate the process is being applied.
7. A dialog box will be displayed when successfully completed.
TIP
This structure is created by each TUG-3 and will no be reflected in to the other two
TUG-3. If the intention is create three TU-3 inside of one AU-4, these steps must be
done into the other two TUG-3.

44

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Fig. 30 Payload structure to TU-3 III

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

45

Operation: Traffic Setup

3.4.3

Creating a bi directional VC-12 cross connection

A bi directional VC-12 cross connection is the most common cross connection


in use. In order to create such a connection:
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration Cross-Connect
Management. A blank Cross connect Management screen will appear.
2. Press the "Create" button at the bottom of the window to open the "Create
Cross-Connect" window.
3. Select "Direction" as "Bidirectional" (default selection).
4. Assign a "Circuit Label" to the cross connection (optional). This may help to
identify the cross-connection at later point in time.
5. Select "Capacity" as "VC-12" (default selection).
6. Select the "A" Card and the "Z" Card.

46

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Fig. 31 Cross Connection Management window

7
6

Fig. 32 Create a cross connection I

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

47

Operation: Traffic Setup

7. Select a Port for TP "A" and then a port for TP "Z".


8. Select the two TU-12 containers to be connected. The selected TU-12s are
shown with a blue background color.
TIP
If the desired TU-12 container is not listed, check if the TP has been used for another
cross connection or SNCP protection. First check if the payload structure is the
correct one. All this can be done by analyzing the "TP Multiplexing Structure".
9. Press either the "Apply" or "OK" button. The "Apply" button will keep the
"Create Cross connection" window open after the cross connection has
been created. The "OK" button will close the "Create Cross connection"
window.
An information box will be displayed during the time taken by the network element
to create the cross connection.
10. After the cross connection has been successfully created, a dialog box will
show up informing about the result. Press the "OK" button to confirm.
TIP
The above procedure can be followed for creating cross connections at any level.
Instead of selecting the "Capacity" parameter as "VC-12" select the desired level as
"VC-3", "VC-4", "VC4-4c", "VC4-16c" or "VC4-64c".

48

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Fig. 33 Create a cross connection II

8
7

10

Fig. 34 Crete a cross connection II

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

49

Operation: Traffic Setup

3.4.4

Creating multiple cross connections

Multiple cross connections can be created at the same time between the same
cards. This may be useful when creating Virtually Concatenated Ethernet services or
multiple TU-12/VC-12 services.
Follow the directions given above but instead of selecting one termination point (step
8) hold down either the CTRL or SHIFT key and select multiple termination points.
CTRL will allow the selection of non sequential points whereas SHIFT allows the
selection of sequential points.
WARNING
Note: When the equipment creates the cross connection it will connect the
top two selected points and then the next two selected points and so on up to
the end. It will not connect the points in the order they were selected.

50

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Multiple selection
using Ctrl button

Multiple selection
using Shift button

Fig. 35 Creating a multiple cross connection

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

51

Operation: Traffic Setup

3.4.5

Creating a broadcast (point to multipoint) cross


connection

A Broadcast cross connection consists of a series of unidirectional cross


connections where the root point (TP A) is the same but the leaf endpoints (TP Z) are
different.
TIP
The maximum number of leaf endpoints for a single P2MP connection at the HOCC
switching matrix is 16.
Each cross connection must be created separately.
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration Cross Connect
Management. A blank "Cross connect Management" screen will appear.
2. Press the "Create" button at the bottom of the window to open the "Create
Cross connect" window.
3. Select Direction as "Unidirectional".
4. Assign a "Circuit Label" to the cross connection. This may help identify the
cross connection at a later point in time.
5. Select the correct "Capacity" for the cross connection.
6. Select the desired "A" Card and "Z" Card.
TIP
In this case the direction has to be taken in account. The signal source point should
be selected in the "A" column. The signal destination point should be selected in the
"B" column.
7. Select the "A" Port (or List All) and the "Z" Port
8. Select the two containers desired to be connected.
9. Press the "Apply" button to create the cross connection. An information box
will be displayed during the time taken by the network element to create the cross
connection.
10. Once the cross connection has been successfully created, a dialog box informs
about the results. Press "OK" to finish (the first unidirectional connection is
created).

52

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Fig. 36 Creating a Broadcast cross-connection I

4
5

7
8
7

10

Fig. 37 Creating a Broadcast cross connection II

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

53

Operation: Traffic Setup

In order to create the other leaves for the broadcast cross connection:
11. Keep the "A" point the same and modify the "Z" Card, Port and Termination
Point.
12. Select the two containers and press "Apply". An information box will be
displayed during the time taken by the network element to create the next cross
connection.
13. Press the "OK" button in the dialog box that shows up.
Repeat step 11, 12 and 13 until all leave endpoints have been added to the
Broadcast cross-connection.
TIP
All cross connections that are part of a broadcast cross connection will be listed
as a P2MP (Point to Multi Point) type of connection.

54

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

11

13

12

Fig. 38 Adding a second leg to the broadcast cross connection

Fig. 39 Listing cross connections: P2MP cross connections details

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

55

Operation: Traffic Setup

3.4.6

Creating a loopback cross connection

A loopback cross connection is a special type of unidirectional cross connection


where the source and the destination points are the same. To create a loopback
cross connection:
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration Cross-Connect
Management. A blank "Cross-connect Management" screen will appear.
2. Press the "Create" button at the bottom of the window to open the "Create
Cross-connect" window.
3. Select "Direction" as "Unidirectional".
4. Assign a "Circuit Label" to the cross - connection. This may help identify the
cross connection at a later point in time.
5. Select the "Capacity" for the cross connection.
6. Select the same card for "A" Card and "Z" Card
7. Select the same port for "A" Port and "Z" Port
8. Select the same container in both columns (A and Z).
9. Press either the "Apply" or "OK" button. After this an information box will be
displayed during the time taken by the network element to create the cross
connection.
10. Press "OK" in the dialog box that shows up to finish.

56

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Fig. 40 Creating a Loopback cross-connection

4
5
6

7
6
8
6

10

9
6

Fig. 41 Creating a Loopback cross connection

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

57

Operation: Traffic Setup

3.4.7

Modifying the Cross connection

The existing cross connections list into the 7080, there is possible to have access
to the details of the cross connections and make few modifications.
To have access to the details of the cross connection, go to the Cross-Connection
Management window, select the desire cross connections. The background entry
will turn to blue color and click the option View. New window will pop-up with the
details of the cross connection. All the fields are in a grey color means no possibility
to change anything.
There is another way to have access to the same window, just click twice over the
desire cross connection.
In order to modify the cross connection, select the desire cross connection and
click in the option Modify. The Modify Cross-Connection window will pop up. The
available fields are Type (this topic will be discusses later) and Circuit Label.

58

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Fig. 42 Cross connection details

Fig. 43 Cross connection modifications

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

59

Operation: Traffic Setup

3.4.8

Deleting a cross connection

If a cross connection is no longer required it can be deleted in order to make the


bandwidth available for future connections. For deleting a cross connection:
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration Cross-Connect
Management. A blank Cross-connect Management screen will appear.
2. Set the filter as required at the top of the window to limit the list of cross
connections.
3. Press the "Query" button to display the filtered list of cross connections.
4. Select the cross connection to be deleted (the background color changes to
blue)
5. Press the "Delete" button.
6. A dialog box will be displayed warning about the consequences of the deletion
and asking for confirmation. Make sure the connection to be deleted is the right
one and press "Yes". A waiting dialog will be displayed during the time it takes
for the network element to delete the cross connection.
7. An information dialog box will be displayed once the cross connection has been
successfully deleted. Press the "OK" button to finish.

60

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Fig. 44 Deleting a cross connection I

Fig. 45 Deleting a cross connection II

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

61

Operation: Traffic Setup

3.5

NE Resource Usage Statistics

To get an overview about used and unused resources (TPs) in the NE:
1. From the "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration NE Resource
Usage Statistics
2. In the top section of the "Resource Usage Statistics" window a list with the
following information is displayed:

Card: Displays all the cards in use.


Port: Displays all the ports of the corresponding cards.
Usage Percentage: Displays the usage of this port in percentage.
3. Select one port
4. The details of selected port will be listed in the CTP Usage Detail list.

CTP Mapping: Displays the TP mapping.


Used or Not: Displays the CTP's state.

62

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Fig. 46 NE Resource Usage Statistics

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

63

Operation: Traffic Setup

64

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Exercise

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

65

Operation: Traffic Setup

66

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Exercise 1
Title:
NE / Card / Port Properties Configuration
Objectives:
The participant shall be able to recognize the different cards populated in the NE
chassis
Pre-requisite:
Pre-read chapter
Task
Ask your instructor for the name of your team (e.g. student01), name and IP address
of the network element which will be used for the exercises (e.g. NE name: Leipzig,
NE IP address: 172.16.8.61, NE management IP address: 10.10.6.10/
255.255.255.240) and write it down in the list below.

I am working with the team:

student _ _

Name of the real NE: ____________________


NE IP address :

__ . __ . __ . __

MGMT IP address :

__ . __ . __ . __

MGMT Net Mask :

__ . __ . __ . __

Fig. 47 Start up information

Start Network Element Management for your NE. Check if you have "Write
Access".

Open the "NE Properties Configuration" window.


Open the "Card Properties Configuration" window for the STM-4/1 in Slot 17
Open the "Port Properties Configuration" window for Port #5.
Open the "Advanced Port Status Information" window.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

67

Operation: Traffic Setup

Query
Complete the following table with the data obtained from the "NE Properties
Configuration" window.

NE Type:
NE Name:
Slot
Number

68

Card Type

Nr. of Ports
Available

Slot
Number

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

10

27

11

28

12

29

13

30

14

31

15

32

16

33

17

FAN

Card Type

Nr. of Ports
Available

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Complete the following table with the data obtained from the "Card Properties
Configuration" window form the card inserted on Slot #17.

NE Type:
NE Name
Slot #
Card Type
Port Number

Port Type

Port Mode

Admin Status

Port Status

P01
P02
P03
P04
P05
P06
P07
P08

Complete the following table with the data obtained from the "Port Properties
Configuration" window.

NE
Card
Port #
Port Type
Port Label
Port Mode
Port Admin Mode
Auto Laser Shutdown
Port ALS Mode
Working Mode
Operating Status

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

69

Operation: Traffic Setup

Complete the following table with the data obtained from the "Advanced Port
Status Information" window.

Card Name
Port Name
Operation Status
Laser Bias Current
Received Laser Power
Transmitted Laser Power
Transceiver Temperature
Nominal Bit Rate
Laser Wavelength
Link Length
SFP Vendor Name
NSN Part number
Vendor's Manufacturing Date

FINISH.

Ive got it !

Fig. 48 End of exercise 1

70

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Exercise 2
Title:
Cross Connection Management

Objectives:
The participant is be able to list, create, modify and delete cross connections

Pre-requisite:
Pre read the information given in this chapter.

Task 1
Ask your instructor for the name of your team (e.g. student01), name and IP address
of the network element which will be used for the exercises (e.g. NE name: Leipzig,
NE IP address: 172.16.8.61, NE management IP address: 10.10.6.10/
255.255.255.240) and write it down in the list below.

I am working with the team:

student _ _

Name of the real NE: ____________________


NE IP address :

__ . __ . __ . __

MGMT IP address :

__ . __ . __ . __

MGMT Net Mask :

__ . __ . __ . __

Fig. 49 Cross connection start up information

In this part of the exercise each team has to create a 2 Mbps bi-directional crossconnection.

In the MUX plan shown below find the NE assigned to your team, just have a look
about the cross-connection data for the connection to be created.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

71

Operation: Traffic Setup

VC-12 Bidirectional Cross Connections: MUX Plan


2 Mbps Electrical

DDF

DDF

STM 4
STM 4
STM 4

Slot Slot Slot Slot


LC13
16#5
#5 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7
#1#2
7080 Leipzig
Leipzig (L)
(L)
7080
Slot 3
172.16.8.61
172.16.8.61
#1
10.10.6.10
10.10.6.10
LC7

Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot


#8
17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 16 #5 16 C
C
7080 Potsdam
Potsdam (P)
(P)
Slot
7080
2
Slot 2
172.16.8.62
17 #8
172.16.8.62
#1
10.10.6.20
10.10.6.20
C3
Slot
C
Slot 2 Slot Slot Slot
#1
1
#2
17 #5 16 #1 17 #1

STM 16

C2
Slot
C
Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot #2
#1
1
16 #2 17 #2 #2 25 #1

Leipzig Extension Shelf


172.16.8.65
10.10.6.70

EXT Shelf

TEAM 2
STM 16

STM 16

STM 4

STM 4

TEAM 1
STM 4

C
C
1

Slot
16 C
#8
C
Slot
2
17 #8

STM 4

LC 1
#1

Slot
CC1
C
C
Slot
2
CC2

STM 16
2 Mbps
Electrical

LC1
#1

C
C
2
Slot
CC1
C
Slot
C
CC2
1

Slot Slot Slot Slot 2


Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 17 #5 #2
#2
#1
7080 Wuppertal
7080
Wuppertal (W)
(W) Slot 2
172.16.8.63
172.16.8.63
Slot
#1
10.10.6.50
10.10.6.50
16 #8

Slot Slot 2 Slot Slot


C
17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2
C
#1
7080 Landau
Landau (LD)
(LD)
1
7080
Slot 3
172.16.8.64
172.16.8.64
Slot
#1
10.10.6.40
10.10.6.40
16C#8
C
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot
2
17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 16 #5 17 #8

STM 16

Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot


17 #8 25 #1 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2

EXT Shelf

STM 4
Wuppertal Extension Shelf
172.16.8.67
10.10.6.100

TEAM 4

TEAM 3

STM 4
STM 4

DDF

Fig. 50 MUX Plan

According with the assigned team, please create the following cross-connections:

72

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Team

Type

Capacity

Label

TPA

TPZ
Slot 3. Port # 1

Bidirectional

VC-12

CC1

LC1. Port # 1

AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 3. Port # 1
Bidirectional

VC-12

CC2

AU-4 # 2

Slot 25. Port # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1
Bidirectional

VC-12

CC1

2
Bidirectional

Bidirectional

VC-12

VC-12

CC2

CC1

3
Bidirectional

VC-12

CC2

Slot 2. Port # 1

Slot 3. Port # 1

AU-4 # 1

AU-4 # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 3. Port # 1

Slot 2. Port # 1

AU-4 # 2

AU-4 # 2

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 2. Port # 1

Slot 3. Port # 1

AU-4 # 1

AU-4 # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 3. Port # 1

Slot 2. Port #1

AU-4 # 2

AU-4 # 2

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 2. Port #1
Bidirectional

VC-12

CC1

AU-4 # 1

Slot 25. Port # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 2. Port # 1
Bidirectional

VC-12

CC2

LC 1. Port # 1

AU-4 # 2
TU-12 # 1.1.1

Query
After creation of all cross-connections contact your instructor. He will prove the
functionality of the created path using a PDH/SDH test set.

Delete all cross-connections, which have been created. Check the result of
deleting with the "Cross-Connect Management" window.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

73

Operation: Traffic Setup

Task 2
In this part of the exercise each team need to create a VC-12 broadcast cross
connection.

In the MUX plan shown below find the NE assigned to your team and look down to
find in the table, the relevant cross-connection data for the connection to be
created.

VC-12 Broadcast Cross Connections: MUX Plan


DDF

2 Mbps Electrical

STM 4
STM 4
STM 4

Slot Slot Slot Slot


LC13
16#5
#5 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7
#1#2
7080
7080 Leipzig
Leipzig (L)
(L)
Slot 3
172.16.8.61
172.16.8.61
#1
10.10.6.10
10.10.6.10
LC7

Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot


#8
17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 25 #1 16 C
C
7080
Slot
7080 Potsdam
Potsdam (P)
(P)
2
Slot 2
172.16.8.62
17 #8
172.16.8.62
#1
10.10.6.20
10.10.6.20
C3
Slot
C
Slot 2 Slot Slot Slot
#1
1
#2
17 #5 16 #1 17 #1

STM 16

C2
Slot
C
Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot #2
#1
1
16 #2 17 #2 #2 25 #5

Leipzig Extension Shelf


172.16.8.65
10.10.6.70

EXT Shelf

TEAM 2
STM 16

STM 16

STM 4

STM 4

TEAM 1
STM 4

C
C
1

Slot
16 C
#8
C
Slot
2
17 #8

STM 4

LC 1
#1

Slot
CC1
C
C
Slot
2
CC2

STM 16
2 Mbps
Electrical

LC 1
#1

C
C
2
Slot
CC1
C
Slot
C
CC2
1

Slot Slot Slot Slot 2


Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 17 #5 #2
#2
#1
7080 Wuppertal
7080
Wuppertal (W)
(W) Slot 2
172.16.8.63
172.16.8.63
Slot
#1
10.10.6.50
10.10.6.50
16 #8

Slot Slot 2 Slot Slot


C
17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2
C
#1
7080
1
7080 Landau
Landau (LD)
(LD)
Slot 3
172.16.8.64
172.16.8.64
Slot
#1
10.10.6.40
C
10.10.6.40
16 #8
C
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot
2
17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 25 #1 17 #8

STM 16

Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot


17 #8 25 #5 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2

EXT Shelf

STM 4
Wuppertal Extension Shelf
172.16.8.67
10.10.6.100

TEAM 4

STM 4

TEAM 3

STM 4

Fig. 51 MUX Plan

According with your team, please create the relative cross connections required

74

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Team

Type

Capacity

Name

TPA

TPZ
Slot 16. Port # 1.AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1

Unidirectional

VC-12

BR

LC1.

Slot 17. Port # 1. AU-4 # 1

Port # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 2. Port # 2. AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 16. Port # 1. AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1

Unidirectional

VC-12

BR

Slot 25.

Slot 17. Port # 1. AU-4 #1

Port # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 2. Port # 2. AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot2. Port # 1. AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1

Unidirectional

VC-12

BR

Slot 25.

Slot16. Port # 1. AU-4 #1

Port # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 17. Port # 3. AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 3. Port # 1. AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1

Unidirectional

VC-12

BR

LC1.

Slot 17. Port # 1. AU-4 # 1

Port # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 17. Port # 2. AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1

Query
After creation of all cross-connections contact your instructor. He will prove the
functionality of the created path using a PDH/SDH test set.

Delete all cross connections, which have been created. Check the result of
deleting with the "Cross-Connect Management" window.

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

75

Operation: Traffic Setup

Task 3
In this part of the exercise each team has to create a loopback cross connection.
In the MUX plan shown below find the NE assigned to your team and find out the
relevant cross connection data for the connection to be created.

VC-12 Loopback Cross Connections: MUX Plan


DDF

2 Mbps Electrical

DDF

STM 4
STM 4
STM 4

Slot Slot Slot Slot


LC13
16#5
#5 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7
#1#2
7080
7080 Leipzig
Leipzig (L)
(L)
Slot 3
172.16.8.61
172.16.8.61
#1
10.10.6.10
10.10.6.10
LC7

Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot


#8
17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 16 #5 16 C
C
7080
Slot
7080 Potsdam
Potsdam (P)
(P)
2
Slot 2
172.16.8.62
17 #8
172.16.8.62
#1
10.10.6.20
10.10.6.20
C3
Slot
C
Slot 2 Slot Slot Slot
#1
1
#2
17 #5 16 #1 17 #1

STM 16

C2
Slot
C
Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot #2
#1
1
16 #2 17 #2 #2 25 #5

Leipzig Extension Shelf


172.16.8.65
10.10.6.70

EXT Shelf

TEAM 2

STM 16

STM 4

STM 4

TEAM 1
STM 16

C
C
1

Slot
16 C
#8
C
Slot
2
17 #8

STM 4

Slot
CC1
C
C
Slot
2
CC2

STM 4

LC 1
#1

STM 16
2 Mbps
Electrical

LC 1
#1

C
C
2
Slot
CC1
C
Slot
C
CC2
1

Slot Slot Slot Slot 2


Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 17 #5 #2
#2
#1
7080
7080 Wuppertal
Wuppertal (W)
(W) Slot 2
172.16.8.63
172.16.8.63
Slot
#1
10.10.6.50
10.10.6.50
16 #8

Slot Slot 2 Slot Slot


C
17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2
C
#1
7080
Landau
(LD)
1
7080 Landau (LD)
Slot 3
172.16.8.64
172.16.8.64
Slot
#1
10.10.6.40
C
10.10.6.40
16 #8
C
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot
2
17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 16 #5 17 #8

STM 16

Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot


17 #8 25 #5 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2

EXT Shelf

STM 4
Wuppertal Extension Shelf
172.16.8.67
10.10.6.100

TEAM 4

TEAM 3

STM 4
STM 4

DDF

Fig. 52 MUX Plan

According with your team, find in the table the required cross connection:

76

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Operation: Traffic Setup

Team

Type

Capacity

Name

TPA

TPZ

Unidirectional

VC-12

LB

LC 1. Port # 1

LC 1. Port # 1

Unidirectional

VC-12

LB

LC 1. Port # 1

LC 1. Port # 1

Query
Delete all cross connections, which have been created. Check the result of
deleting with the "Cross-Connect Management" window.

FINISH.

Ive got it !

Fig. 53 End of exercise 2

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

77

Operation: Traffic Setup

78

FT52425EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Protection Features

Contents
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
3
3.1
3.2
4
4.1
4.2
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
6

Protection features general


Protection architectures
Switching types
Protection mode
Traffic Protections
MSP Line protection
Path protection
Multiplex Section Self Protecting Ring (MS-SPRing)
Equipment protection
1:N card protection
1+1 card protection
Protection support for SURPASS hiT 7080
Traffic Protection
Card protection
Protection configuration
MSP 1+1
MSP 1:N
Path protection
E1; E3/DS3 and STM-1 Electrical Card Protection
HOCC card protection
LOCC Card protection
System Controller Card Protection
Exercise

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

3
4
8
12
15
16
16
18
25
26
26
29
30
30
33
34
44
56
70
78
80
82
85

Protection Features

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Protection features general

Drop & Continue


Path Protection
VC Trail Protection
SNCP

Traffic Protection

Card Protection

SDH
Network
Line Protection

Self Healing Ring Protection

Multiplex Section Protection

Single Ended MSP

Double Ended MSP

MS-SPRING/2

Fig. 1 Protection features

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

1.1

Protection architectures

1+1 protection architecture


In the 1+1 architecture type, a protection transport entity (e.g. a multiplex section) is
dedicated as a backup facility for the working transport entity with the normal traffic
signal bridged onto the protection transport entity at the source end point of the
protected domain.
The normal traffic on working and protection transport entities is transmitted
simultaneously to the sink end-point of the protected domain, where a selection
between the working and protection transport entity is made based on some
predetermined criteria, such as signal fail and signal degrade indications.

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

1+1 protection
protection in
in fault-free
fault-free case

working
Normal

Norma l

protection

Selector

Selector

Permanent
Bridge

Pe rmanent
Bridge

Fig. 2 1+1 protection in fault-free case

1+1
1+1 protection
protection in case
case of
of fault
fault

SWITCH
SWITCH

working

Normal

Norma l

protection

Selector
Permanent
Bridge

Selector
Pe rmanent
Bridge

Fig. 3 1+1 protection in faulty case

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

1:N protection architecture


In the 1: N architecture type, 1 dedicated protection transport entity is a shared
backup facility for N working transport entities. The bandwidth of the protection
transport entity should be allocated in such a way that it may be possible to protect
any of the n working transport entities in case the protection transport entity is
available.
When a working transport entity is determined to be impaired, its normal traffic signal
must be transferred from the working to the protection transport entity at both the
source and sink end-points of the protected domain. It is noted that when more than
1 working transport entities is impaired, only 1 normal traffic signal can be protected.
The bridge can be realized in two manners:

broadcast bridge
selector bridge
With "broadcast bridge" connectivity (Fig. 4) the normal traffic signal is permanent
connected to the working transport entity and occasionally to the protection transport
entity (Fig. 5) also.
With "selector bridge" connectivity the normal traffic signal is connected either to the
working transport entity, or the protection transport entity. Interworking between the
two options is guaranteed.

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

1:n protection without extra traffic in fault-free case

Null signal (0)

Null signal (0)

Normal (1)

Working (1)

Normal (1)

Normal (2)

Working (2)

Normal (2)

Normal (n)

Working (n)

Normal (n)

Extra (n+1)

Protection (0)

AIS

Extra (n+1)

AIS

Selector

Selector
Bridge

Bridge

Fig. 4 1:n protection architecture with broadcast bridge and without extra traffic (fault free case)

1:n protection without extra traffic in case of fault


SWITCH

SWITCH

Null signal (0)

Null signal (0)

Normal (1)

Normal (1)

Working (1)

SWITCH

Working (2)

Normal (2)

Normal (n)

Working (n)

Normal (n)

Extra (n+1)

Protection (0)

Normal (2)

SWITCH

AIS

Extra (n+1)

AIS

Selector

Selector
Bridge

Bridge

Fig. 5 1:n protection architecture with broadcast bridge and without extra traffic (fault case)

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

1.2

Switching types

Unidirectional switching
If a fault occurs on the worker line, the signal is switched to the protection line. In
case of single ended switching, only the affected transmission direction is switched.
In the opposite direction, the signal remains on the worker line. This protection
switching scheme is also known as "Single ended protection switching".

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Unidirectional switching: Worker line used


worker

protection

Fig. 6 Principle of unidirectional switching: Worker line used

Unidirectional switching: Protection line used

worker
SWITCH

protection

Fig. 7 Principle of unidirectional switching: Protection line used

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Bi directional switching
If a fault occurs on the worker line, the signal is switched to the protection line. In
case of bi directional switching, both transmission directions are switched to the
protection line. This protection switching scheme is also known as "double ended
protection switching".

10

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Bi-directional switching: Worker line used

worker

protection

Fig. 8 Principle of bi directional switching: Worker line used

Bi-directional switching: Protection line used

worker
SWITCH

SWITCH

protection

Fig. 9 Principle of bi directional switching: Protection line used

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

11

Protection Features

1.3

Protection mode

Non revertive protection switching


If a fault occurs on the working line, the traffic is switched to the protection line. In
non revertive protection mode, the data signal will remain on the protection line
after the fault has been cleared. The switch back to the original line will only occur if a
new fault occurs on the protection line, or by operator command.

Revertive protection switching


In case of a failure, the data signal will be switched to the protection line. Once the
fault has been cleared, and the line is working in a fault free state, the traffic will be
switched back to the worker line. Before this switching-back occurs, the worker line
must remain fault free for at least some minutes. This period is called "Wait Time to
Restore" and can be configured individually.

12

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Non-revertive protection mode



fault clearance
clearance

WORKER Path

error free worker

switch over

PROTECTION Path

Fig. 10 Principle of non revertive operation

Revertive protection mode


Wait-To-Restore
Periode
0 ... 30 min

fault clearance

switch over

PROTECTION Path

WTR
switch back

WORKER Path

error
e.g. SF

Fig. 11 Principle of revertive operation

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

13

Protection Features

14

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Traffic Protections

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

15

Protection Features

2.1

MSP Line protection

Duplicated lines in a multiplex section characterize line protection switching. On the


receiving side one of the two lines is selected from which to derive the signal. On
both lines, transmit side and receive side, two line ports have to be installed. The
signals transmitted on both lines are monitored. On the receiving side the switch card
selects, based on predefined switching criteria, which line signal will be passed within
the switching matrix.

2.2

Path protection

1+1 Path Protection, also named "Sub Network Connection Protection" (SNCP), is
implemented and activated at the cross connection level. Path protection can be
implemented in either linear or ring structures.
The data signal is transmitted over two different paths having the same starting and
ending termination points. At the ending termination point, the switchover criteria are
defined and evaluated. If the received signal on the worker path exceeds the quality
thresholds, the signal will be taken from the protection path. The criteria for switching
are laid down individually during configuration of the individual devices (evaluation of
the Path Overhead).
Using path protection, each data signal is transmitted twice: on the worker path and
on the protection path. Therefore additional transmission capacity must be provided
on the effected line connections.
Currently there are two ways to configure a SNCP, the so called Intrusive SNCP
(SNCP/I) and the Non Intrusive SNCP (SNCP/N).
SNCP/I
When an Inherent SNCP protection is configured on an NE, the switching criteria
used to go from the working path to the protection one are signal fails, for LO VC the
failures would be TU-LOP and TU-AIS or an internal reaction (SSF) related to a
higher order failure.
SNCP/N
In the case of Non Intrusive SNCP additionally to the Signal Failures mentioned
previously, the information inside the VC POH is considered. So BIP error codes,
path trace mismatches and signal label incongruence could also be a motive to
switch over. In order to support the SNCP/N protection, the CTPs have to be able to
detect alarm conditions related with the VC POH.

16

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Line Protection
worker card

worker line

switching matrix

protection line

protection card

Fig. 12 Principle of line protection

Path Protection

Working Path

Protection Path

Switch
only one direction shown

Definition of
Switching Criteria

Fig. 13 Principle of path protection

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

17

Protection Features

2.3

Multiplex Section Self Protecting Ring (MSSPRing)

MS-SPRing is also known as Bi directional Self Healing Ring (BSHR) in other


Siemens products
The MS-SPRing configuration consists of several network elements whose line
interfaces are connected to each other in a form of a ring. During normal operation,
path switching generally occurs via the shortest path in order to involve the least
number of network elements.
If a fault in the multiplex section occurs the data will be looped back at both ends of
the faulty section via the protection path. Therefore half of the ring capacity must be
reserved for the protection path.

18

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

n . . . Normal Traffic

Worker
Protection

Fig. 14 Multiplex Section Self Protecting Ring Normal state

Worker
Protection

n . . . Normal Traffic

Fig. 15 Multiplex Section Self Protecting Ring Activated State

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

19

Protection Features

2.3.1

2 Fiber MS-SPRing ring

2 Fiber MS-SPRing rings require only two fibers for each span of the ring. Each fiber
carries both working channels and protection channels. On each fiber, half the
channels are defined as working channels and half are defined as protection
channels.
The normal traffic carried on working channels in one fiber is protected by the
protection channels traveling in the opposite direction around the ring (See Fig. 16).
This permits the transport of protected normal traffic and unprotected traffic been
carried in the protection channels. If a fault occurs the unprotected traffic will be lost
and only the protected traffic carried. Only one set of overhead channels is used on
each fiber.
2F MS-SPRing rings support ring switching only. When a ring switch is invoked, the
normal traffic is switched from the working channels to the protection channels in the
opposite direction.

20

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

2F-MS-SPRING

STM # 1-8

STM # 1-8

worker
protection

worker
protection

Fiber 1

STM # 9-16

STM # 9-16

STM # 1-8

STM # 1-8
worker
protection

worker
protection

Fiber 2

STM # 9-16

STM # 9-16

Fig. 16 2F-MS-SPRing

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

21

Protection Features

2.3.2

Non pre emptible Unprotected Traffic (NUT)

With ITU T recommendation G-841 there is a feature called Non pre emptible
Unprotected Traffic (NUT). This allows the selection of VC-4 contains which will be
protected by MS-SPRing and which containers will not be protected.
With No NUT containers selected VC-4 # 1 to VC-4 # 8 carry traffic and are all
protected by VC-4 # 9 to VC-4 # 16. If VC-4 # 3 is selected as a NUT container it will
not be protected by MS-SPRing should a fault occur, but it may be protected by
another protection method such as SNCP. Should this occur this will also free VC-4 #
11 from protecting VC-4 # 3, so extra unprotected traffic can be carried in this
container.

22

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

VC-4 # 16

VC-4 # 9

VC-4 # 8

VC-4 # 1

Non pre-emptible Unprotected Traffic (NUT)

VC-4 # 16

VC-4 # 11

VC-4 # 9

VC-4 # 8

VC-4 # 1

VC-4 # 3

Without NUT

With VC-4 # 3 as a NUT Container


Protected Container

Protecting Container

Unprotected Container

Fig. 17 NUT

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

23

Protection Features

24

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Equipment protection

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

25

Protection Features

Equipment (module) protection is designed to react in case of card failures. Two


types of module protection are supported 1:N Card Protection and 1+1 Card
Protection.

3.1

1:N card protection

The 1:N card protection feature allows the protection of one or more modules by one
additional protection card. In the event of a module failure, the traffic of the first
module, which fails will be taken over by the protection card.

3.2

1+1 card protection

For 1+1 card protection, an additional module is inserted for protection. This module
only protects the traffic of one specified card in case of different events like card
failure or operator switch.
The signals are offered to both the working and the protection module. Both modules
distribute the signal to the next operation card (e.g. the switching network CC) which
then chooses one of the two signals, based on predetermined criteria.

26

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

1:N Card Protection

1:N

protection module

working modules

Fig. 18 1:N card protection

1+1 Card Protection

working
workingmodule
module

1+1
1+1

protection
protectionmodule
module

working
module
module
switch
switch

protection
module

switching
network

Fig. 19 1+1 card protection

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

27

Protection Features

28

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Protection support for SURPASS hiT 7080

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

29

Protection Features

4.1
4.1.1

Traffic Protection
MSP protection

In this SURPASS hiT 7080 equipment, 1+1 and 1:N MSP (NMax=14) line protection is
available for all SDH interfaces. Worker and Protection ports can be either located on
the same card or different cards. There is no limitation regarding the position where
the Worker and Protection ports have to be equipped. It is not necessary to configure
Worker and Protection ports on neighbor cards.
The protection can be configured in order to work with bidirectional or unidirectional
switching. Revertive or Non-Revertive operation is possible.

4.1.2

MS-SPRing

2 Fiber MS-SPRing is supported at STM-64, STM-16 and STM-4 levels. In order to


increase de bandwidth utilization it is possible to take advantage of low priority traffic
and NUT functionalities.
In case of multiple ring failure operation, the system builds automatically the
corresponding squelch tables using the information given by the configured cross
connections. Squelch tables manual configuration is also possible.

4.1.3

Path protection

SNCP protection at all levels is supported.


The protection can be configured as Revertive and Non-Revertive.
The protection can be configured as SNCP/I or SNCP/N.
When the system is configured to work with SNCP/I, it means, only reacting in case
of signal fail (HP-SSF or LP-SSF). The SSF alarm arises in case of defects in the
signal server layer (e.g. LOS, LOP, AIS, etc).
In order to support SNCP/N, the non intrusive monitoring has to be enabled
(monitored status) on the CTP. In this case besides the SD and EXC BER, the
system can also react in case of TIM.

4.2

Card protection

The following cards support equipment protection in the equipment

HOCC comprising high order switch matrix and timing protection.


LOCC comprising low order switch matrix.
SC system controller card.
E1 and STM-1 E cards

30

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Summary Traffic protection


hiT 7070

hiT 7060
HC

hiT 7060

hiT 7050
CC

hiT 7050
FP1

hiT 7035

hiT 7030

1+1 MSP

STMSTM1,4,16,64 1,4,16,64

STM1,4,16,64

STM1,4,16

STM-1,4,16

STM-1,4

STM1,4,16

STM-1,4

STM1,4,16

STM-1,4

1:1 MSP

STM1,4,16,64

1:N MSP

STMSTM1,4,16,64 1,4,16,64
STM4,16,64

STM-4,16

STM-16

STM-4,16

STM-4

STM-4,16

STM-4

All line
rates

All line
rates

All line
rates

All line
rates

All line
rates

All line
rates

All line
rates

hiT 7080

BSHR-2

STM4,16,64

STM16,64

BSHR-4

SNCP
(LO,HO)

STM16,64

hiT 7025 hiT 7020

All line
rates

All line
rates

All line
rates

Fig. 20 Summary Traffic Protection

Summary Protection Features

hiT 7080

hiT 7070

STM-1,4,16,64
port with MSP

1+1

hiT 7060
HC

hiT 7060

STM-1,4,16,64
port with MSP

STM-1,4,16port
with MSP

VC-4 Matrix

VC-4 Matrix

VC-3/-12
Matrix

VC-3/-12
Matrix

hiT 7050
CC

hiT 7050
FP1

STM-1,4,16
port with MSP

STM-1,4,16,64
port with MSP

VC-4 Matrix

VC-4 Matrix

VC-3/-12 Matrix

VC-3/-12 Matrix

CLU

CLU

CLU

VC-3/-12
Matrix

PWR

PWR

CLU

SC

PWR

PWR

34/45 Mbps
card

34/45 Mbps
card

34/45 Mbps
card

STM-1e card

STM-1e card

STM-1e card

VC-4 Matrix

PWR

STM-1,4 port
with MSP
PWR

hiT 7035

hiT 7025

STM-1,4 port
with MSP

STM-1,4 port
with MSP

VC-4 Matrix

VC-4 Matrix

VC-3/-12
Matrix

VC_3/-12
Matrix

CLU

CLU

PWR

PWR

34/45 Mbps
card

34/45 Mbps
card

STM-1e card

STM-1e card

2M card

2M card

34/45 Mbps
card

1:N

STM-1e card
2M card

STM-1e card

2M card

2M card

2M card

Fig. 21 Summary Protection Features

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

31

Protection Features

32

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Protection configuration

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

33

Protection Features

5.1
5.1.1

MSP 1+1
Create MSP 1+1

In order to configure a MSP 1+1 protection:


1. From "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration MSP Management.
2. Press the "Query" button to view the MSP groups created on the network
element, if there is any. You can set "Query Conditions" to filter for specific
protection groups.
3. Press the "Create" button to create a new MSP line protection.
4. The "Create Linear MSP Group" window will open.
5. The changeable options available in the basic information window pane are:

MSP Mode: Set the MSP mode as MSP 1+1


Active Mode: Enable by default. This field is used only for 1: N protection.
Port type: Select the bandwidth of the port from the drop-down list (e.g. STM-4)
Group label: Every MSP requires always a Protection Group Label which

identifies it from other created MSP protections on the Network element. Text
String with max. 64 characters. Must not contain "space" character.

Operation Mode: either Revertive or Non Revertive.


Switch Direction: either Unidirectional Switch or Bidirectional Switch.
Working Channel number: The working channel number is displayed in the text
box.

Extra traffic: Select Enable or Disable from the drop-down list when the MSP
mode is set as MSP 1:N

Wait to Restore: only available if Revertive operation has been selected. A value
between 60 seconds and 720 seconds (300 seconds by default).

6. Select "Card" and "Port" for "Protection Multiplex section".


7. Select "Card" and "Port" for "Working Multiplex section".
8. Click the "Apply or Ok" button to create the MSP group. An "Information"
window will pop up.
TIP
There is no restriction which card / port is selected as working and which one is
selected as protection. The ports can be on the same card or on any other as
long as the STM level is the same
9. Press the "OK" button to confirm.

34

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

2
1

Fig. 22 Creating MSP 1+1 protection I

7
1
8
3
9

Fig. 23 Creating MSP 1+1 protection II

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

35

Protection Features

WARNING
MSP can not be created if there are cross connections on the protection line.

TIP
If the TP Multiplex Structure is different for the worker and the protection line, a
notifying message box will be displayed. If Yes is clicked on the message box, the
worker line structure will be applied to the protection line.

WARNING
If the DCCs in the protection line are activated, the system will deactivate them
before the protection is created. The NE will ask for a confirmation. Check on
the remote NE if the DCC in the worker line are activated and up in order to
prevent loosing communication before deactivating the protection line DCCs.

36

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Fig. 24 Creating MSP 1+1 protection III

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

37

Protection Features

5.1.2

View / Modify MSP

1. From "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration MSP Management.


1) Press the "Query" button to get a list of all MSP lines configured on the network
element. The list will show the status of existing MSP groups.
2) To get detailed information about worker and protection lines select the desired
MSP group from the list. The background line color will turn to blue.
3) Click the "View/Modify" button. The "View/Modify MSP Property" window will
pop up.
4) It is possible to change the following parameters:

Wait to Restore
Group Label
5) Press the "Apply or Ok" button to change the configuration. An "Information"
window will pop up.
6) Click the "OK" button to confirm.

38

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Fig. 25 View/Modify MSP I

5
3

7
6
3

3
4

Fig. 26 View/Modify MSP II

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

39

Protection Features

5.1.3

Switch MSP

1) Open the "MSP Management" window. To switch between the working and
Protection lines, select the desired MSP.
2) Click the "Switch" button to open the "Switch MSP" window.
3) The "Switch MSP" popup window will display:

Current Highest Switch Request


Switch Status
Operator Command Card/Port
External command
Working and Protection port signal status.
4) To switch between worker and Protection lines select the "Operator Command
Card/Port" from list.
5) Select the "External Command" from list. The options available are:

Clear: Clearance for automatic switching (internal switch request).


Lockout of Protection (LP): Forced fixed through connection on the operating
path by "locking" (not be used) the protection path.

Forced Switch: Forced fixed through connection on the other path.


Manual Switch: Through connection on the other path, if this is free from errors.
Remain on the existing path if there is found errors.

6) Press the "Apply or Ok" button to change configuration.


7) Note that if a higher priority command is pending you will get a corresponding
message and your last command will not be executed.
TIP
Each item in the Command drop down menu has a priority. The list is sorted with the
highest priority first. E.g. it is not possible to change from "Lockout" to "Force" or
"Manual" Switch without first clearing the current command.

40

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Fig. 27 Switch MSP I

3
7

6
7

Fig. 28 Switch MSP II

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

41

Protection Features

5.1.4

MSP Deletion

1. From "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration MSP Management.


2. Press the "Query" button to get a list of all MSP groups configured on the
network element.
3. Select the desired MSP to be deleted from list.
4. Press the "Delete" button
5. Press the "Yes" button to confirm.

42

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Fig. 29 Delete MSP I

5
4

Fig. 30 Delete MSP II

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

43

Protection Features

5.2
5.2.1

MSP 1:N
Create MSP 1:N

In order to configure a MSP 1: N protection:


1) From "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration MSP Management.
2) Press the "Query" button to view the MSP groups already configured on the
network element, if there is any. You can set "Query Conditions" to filter for
specific protection groups.
3) Press the "Create" button to create a new MSP line protection.
4) The "Create Linear MSP Group" window will open. In the top of this window,
there are changeable options available in the basic information window pane:

MSP Mode: Set the MSP mode as "MSP 1:N"


Active Mode: Set to "Enable" to activate protection group
Port type: Select STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, or STM-64 from the drop-down list
Group Label: Every MSP line requires a Protection Group Label which identifies
it from other created MSP protections on the Network element. Text String with
max. 64 characters. Must not contain "space" character.

Operation Mode: always set to "Revertive"


Switch Direction: always set to "Bi directional Switch"
Wait to Restore: this field is only available if "Revertive" operation has been
selected. The input value is between 60 seconds and 720 seconds.

Extra Traffic: can be set to "Enable" disable if the protection port will be used for
extra-traffic or not.

5) Select "Card" and "Port" for "Protection Multiplex section".


6) Click "Add" button to add all the working ports in the "Working Multiplex
section".

44

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Fig. 31 Creating 1:N MSP protection I

5
4
6

Fig. 32 Creating 1:N MSP protection II

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

45

Protection Features

7) Select "Working Card" from list


8) Select "Working Port" from list
9) Select "Priority" from list
10) Repeat steps 6 to 9 for additional working ports into the working multiplex section.
11) Click the "Apply or Ok" button to create the MSP group.
12) Information windows will pop-up. Click the "OK" button to finish the MSP creation.
TIP
There is no restriction on which card / port is selected as working and which one is
selected as protection. The ports can be on the same card or on any other as long as
the STM level is the same

WARNING
If the DCCs in the protection line are activated, the system will deactivate them
before the protection is created. The NE will ask for a confirmation. Check on
the remote NE if the DCC in the worker line are activated and up in order to
prevent loosing communication before deactivating the protection line DCCs.

46

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

9
10

11

12

Fig. 33 Creating 1:N MSP protection II

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

47

Protection Features

5.2.2

View / Modify MSP

1) From "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration MSP Management.


2) Press the "Query" button to view the MSP groups already configured on the
network element. The list will show the status of existing MSP groups.
3) To get detailed information about worker and protection lines select the desired
MSP group.
4) Click the "View / Modify" button. The "View / Modify MSP Property" window
will pop up.
5) As long as the MSP 1:N is in the Active Mode "Enable" it is possible to change
the following parameters:

Wait to Restore
Group Label
6) Press the "Apply or Ok" button to change configuration. An "Information"
window will pop up.
7) Click the "OK" button to confirm.

48

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Fig. 34 View/Modify 1:N MSP I

3
6
7

7
4

Fig. 35 View/Modify 1: N MSP II

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

49

Protection Features

8) Set "Active Mode" for the MSP 1: N to the "Disable".


9) Press the "Apply" button to change the configuration. An "Information" window
will pop up.
10) Click the "OK" button to confirm.
11) Now it is possible to modify the members of the existing MSP group. Select the
channel number you want to modify.
12) Select Working Card, Working Port or Priority column and select item from list.
13) It is also possible to add or remove Worker lines to and from the MSP group.
Select "Add" or "Delete" button correspondingly. In case you add a new worker
line to the group you need to define the Working Card, Port and Priority for the
new channel.
TIP
In case that the number of worker channels need to be reduced it must be done
sequentially deleting the channel with the highest number first. It is not possible to
delete any other channel selectively.
14) After making all the changes, there is mandatory to set Enable the Active Mode
of the protection
15) Once more press the "Apply or Ok" button to make your configuration changes
permanent.
16) An Information window will pop up. Click the "OK" button to confirm.

50

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

10

Fig. 36 View/Modify MSP III

14
Only the port with the highest
Channel number can be
deleted first

12
13
12
11
15
11

16

Fig. 37 View/Modify 1:N MSP III

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

51

Protection Features

5.2.3

Switch MSP

1) Open the "MSP Management" window and select the desired MSP, the
background color will turn to blue.
2) Click the "Switch" button to open the "Switch MSP" window.
3) The "Switch MSP" popup window will display:

Current Highest Switch Request


Switch Status
Current Signal State of Working and Protection lines
4) To switch between Worker and Protection lines select the "Operator command
Card/Port" from list.
5) Select the "External Command" you want to issue to the selected Card/Port
from list.
6) Press the "Apply or Ok" button to change configuration.
7) Note that if a higher priority command is pending or you try to switch a lower
priority channel you will get a corresponding message and your last command will
not be executed.
TIP
Each item in the Command drop down menu has a priority. The list is sorted with the
highest priority first. E.g. it is not possible to change from "Lockout" to "Force" or
"Manual Switch" without first clearing the current command.

52

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Fig. 38 Switch 1:N MSP I

3
2

6
5

Fig. 39 Switch 1:N MSP II

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

53

Protection Features

5.2.4

MSP Deletion

1) From "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration MSP Management.


2) Press the "Query" button to view the MSP groups already configured on the
network element.
3) Select the desired MSP to be deleted.
4) Press the "Delete" button.
5) Click "Yes" button to confirm.

54

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Fig. 40 Delete 1:N MSP I

Fig. 41 Delete 1:NMSP II

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

55

Protection Features

5.3
5.3.1

Path protection
Create SNCP

TIP
In order to create a protected path, the worker path has to be created first.
Means is mandatory create the cross connection from the working path.
To create the protection path
1) Select Configuration Cross - Connection Management from the chassis
main menu. An empty window will appear.
2) Press the Batch Create SNCP button to add SNCP protection to a cross
connection.
3) Configure the SNCP behavior:
Capacity: VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12.
Direction: Bidirectional, Source, Sink. This refers to the CC type to be used, not to
the protection switching protocol. When source is selected, the CC is unidirectional
and this is the bridge end point. When Sink is selected, the CC is unidirectional
and this is the switch end point. When bidirectional is selected, the end point is
switch and bridge at the same time.
Restore Mode: Revertive, Non Revertive (only when Bidirectional direction is
selected).
Wait to Restore Time: only when Revertive operation is selected (the minimal
time is 60 seconds and maximum time is 720 seconds). 300 sec by default.
Label: SNCP protection name, this field is mandatory. No blank spaces are
accepted.
Hold of Time: Hold of Time is used when SNCP uses paths routed through
protected sections. The idea behind is to allow the section protection react before
trying a SNCP protection switching in case of a failure in the section layer.
Intrusive Mode:
a) SNC/I: the switching criteria used to go from the working path to the protection
one are signal fails (AIS and LOP), or the internal reaction (SSF) to a higher
order failure. SD is not used as criteria to switch over
b) SNC/N: additionally to the Signal Failures mentioned previously, the
information inside the VC POH is considered. So BIP error codes, path trace
mismatches and signal label incongruence are also reasons to switch over. In
order to support the SNCP/N protection, the corresponding CTPs alarm
monitoring has to be enabled.
4) Select the working point, Card and Port. The SDH card where the path is going to
be routed through has to be selected, not the path end point. Only cross
connected CTPs are shown on the card and port selected.

56

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Fig. 42 Creation of SNCP Protection I

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

57

Protection Features

Once the working CTP has been selected, the other cross connection member is
shown on the "Source/Destination TP" field.
5) Select the protecting card, port and CTP.
6) Press Apply or OK to add protection onto the unprotected cross connection.
7) There will appear a dialog window, where informs about the creation state of the
protection. When it finish, will appear an information window where informs the
successful of the protection. Press OK to go back to the Cross - Connect
Management window.

58

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Source TP will be displayed


when is selected the right
Working TP

6
2

Fig. 43 Creation of SNCP Protection II

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

59

Protection Features

5.3.2

View / Switch SNCP

To view and or switch a protected Cross connection:


1) Go to Configuration Cross - Connect Management.
2) Press Query button, to look all cross connections.
3) Select the desire protection (all the line will turn to blue background) and click in
View button. The "Detail of Cross Connection" window will open.
4) To obtain the current SNCP status and / or to issue maintenance commands click
the "Switch" button. The "SNCP Switch" window will pop up.
The following status information will be displayed:

Active Path
Current Request
Working Signal State
Protection Signal State
5) Choose maintenance command from list. The commands available are:
Clear: No operator command. System chooses working path when it is in normal
state. Wait to Restore time is not considered.
Lockout of Protection: the selected path is the working one. Protection is blocked
for this NE
Forced Switch to Working: selected path is working even been the path is failed
Forced Switch to Protection: selected path is protection even been the path is
failed
Manual Switch to Working: selected path is working if the signal is in normal
state.
Manual Switch to Protection: selected path is protection if the signal is in normal
state.
6) Click the "Apply" button to execute the command.
TIP
Each item in the Command drop down menu has a priority. The list is sorted with the
highest priority first. E.g. it is not possible to change from Lockout to Force or Manual
Switch without first clearing the current command.

60

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Fig. 44 View / Switch SNCP I

3
4

Fig. 45 View / Switch SNCP II

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

61

Protection Features

5.3.3

Modify SNCP Protection Properties

To modify the protection properties of an existing protected cross connection:


1. Select Configuration Cross - Connect Management. The Cross - Connect
Management window will pop-up.
2. Press Query button to get all cross connections.
3. From the list in the "Cross Connection Management" window select the
cross connection you want to modify.
4. Click the "Modify" button. The "Modify Cross Connection" window will pop
up.
5. Change the Protection properties as required.
6. Click "Modify" button to make your changes permanent. After completion of the
command an "Information" box will pop up.
7. Click on "OK" button in the "Information" box to confirm.

62

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Fig. 46 Modify SNCP Protection Properties I

7
5

6
4

Fig. 47 Modify SNCP Protection Properties II

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

63

Protection Features

5.3.4

Remove Protection from existing Protected Cross


connection

To remove protection from a protected cross connection:


1. From the list in the "Cross Connection Management" window select the
protected cross connection you want to modify.
2. Click the "Modify" button. The "Modify Cross Connection" window will pop
up.
3. Select Working or Protection channel which should be still used in the cross
connection.
TIP
Make sure, that the currently active path is the one which you still keep in your
configuration; otherwise a short traffic hit will occur.
4. Click the "Convert to CC" button to remove the other channel. A
"Confirmation" window will pop up.
5. Click the "Yes" button if you want to proceed with the action selected. An
"Information" window will pop up.
6. Click "OK" button to confirm.

64

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

1
3
2

Fig. 48 Remove Protection from existing Protected Cross-Connection

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

65

Protection Features

5.3.5

Add protection to existing Unprotected Cross


connection

To add a protection path to an unprotected cross connection:


1. From the list in the "Cross Connection Management" window select the
unprotected cross connection you want to modify.
2. Click the "Modify" button. The "Modify Cross Connection" window will pop
up.
3. Change the "Type" of cross connection to "Bidirectional Protected Tail End" or
"Bidirectional Protected Head End" as appropriate.
4. Configure "TP A Protection" or "TP Z Protection" respectively: Select Card,
Port and AU-4 number from list
5. Configure the Protection Properties as required.
6. Click the "Add Protection" button to add the protection path. An "Information"
window will pop up.
7. Click the "OK" button to confirm.

66

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

3
7
4

6
2

Fig. 49 Add protection to an unprotected cross-connection

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

67

Protection Features

5.3.6

Delete SNCP

To delete a protected Cross Connection:


1) From the list in the "Cross Connection Management" window select the
desire cross connection to be deleted.
2) Click the "Delete" button. A "Confirmation" dialog box will pop up.
3) Press "Yes" on the "Confirmation" dialog box. The cross connection will be
deleted (Progress is shown in separate window). An "Information" box will pop
up when the deletion is completed.
4) Press "Yes" on the "Information" box.

68

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Fig. 50 Deleting a protected cross-connection

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

69

Protection Features

5.4
5.4.1

E1; E3/DS3 and STM-1 Electrical Card Protection


Create card protection

In order to enable card protection for the E1; E3/DS3 and STM-1 cards, please follow
these procedures:
1. Go to Configuration EPG Management. A new window will pop up.
2. The windows show the existing protections. In order to create a new one, press
Create button.
In this new window there are several settings to select:
3. EPG type: Set the kind of card protection to enable: 1: N E1; 1: N E3DS3 or 1: N
STM-1E.
4. Revertive mode: Revertive by default to all the cases.
5. Protection card: According with the protection type, the equipment will detect
automatically if the card is placed into the protection slot and will displayed the
card into this field. In the case of STM-1 E, since there is two possible equipping
groups into the hiT 7080, select the right protecting card to enable the protection.
6. Wait to restore: Set the maximum recover time from 0 up to 720 seconds (the
default value is 300 sec).
7. Click in the arrows to select and/or remove the desire working cards from the list.
8. Click Create button to activate the protection.
9. An information window will pop up, mentioning about the successful EPG. Click
Ok to confirm.
10. A confirmation window will ask to enable the EPG. Press Yes button.
11. An information window will pop up, click Ok.

70

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Fig. 51 Create EPG I

3
4
6
5
7
6

9
10
11

Fig. 52 Create EPG II

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

71

Protection Features

5.4.2

Modify EPG

In order to modify one of the existing card protections, follow these steps:
1. Go to Configuration EPG Management. The EPG Management window will
pop up.
2. Select from the available list he desire protection. The background color will turn
to blue.
3. Click Modify to have access to the modifications. The Modify EPG window will
pop up.
4. Select the working card which will be excluded and click the left arrow button to
move it to the Available working card area.
5. Click Enable to enable the modified EPG and click OK to confirm the enabled
function.
6. Click Apply to confirm the modification and click Close to close the window.
7. The EPG is now configured as desired.

72

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Fig. 53 EPG modifications I

Fig. 54 EPG modifications II

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

73

Protection Features

5.4.3

Switching EPG

In order to switch EPG, please complete the following steps:


1) In the chassis main menu, select the Configuration EPG Management menu
item. The EPG Management window is opened.
2) Click Refresh to query all EPG information.
3) Select an item in the list by highlighting it in blue and click Switch to open the
EPG External Command window.
4) Select the desired item from the External Command drop-down list.
5) When Forced Switch to Protection or Manual Switch to Protection is selected, the
Working cards drop-down list is enabled. Select the desired working card.
6) Click Apply or OK to confirm the settings.
7) An information window will pop up with the successful of the action. Click OK to
close the window.

74

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

3
2

Fig. 55 Switching EPG I

5
4

6
5

Fig. 56 Switching EPG II

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

75

Protection Features

5.4.4

Delete Card Protection

In order to delete an EPG, please complete the following steps:


1) In the chassis main menu, select Configuration EPG Management menu
item. The Equipment Protection Group Management window is opened.
2) Click Refresh to query all EPG information.
3) Select an item in the list by highlighting it in blue and click Delete to delete the
EPG.
4) Click Yes in the Title_Confirmation window to confirm deleting.
5) Another Confirmation window will pop up to communicate that the system will
proceed to remove the protection. Press Yes to confirm.

76

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

4
3
2

5
2

Fig. 57 EPG deletion process

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

77

Protection Features

5.5

HOCC card protection

HOCC Switch Card protection is self configuring whenever there are two switch cards
inserted on the hiT 7080 subracks.
To identify which switch card is currently active an operator can look at the ACT LED
on the card. This can be seen either on the card or on the LCT program.
Switching between the two cards can be performed by:
1) Selecting Configuration CC 1+1 Protection HOCC 1+1 Protection from
the chassis main menu.
2) This window will display:

Current operation state of each card


Current Latch State of each card
Current Active Card
Current Request
3) An operator can perform a "Manual Switch" between the two cards by selecting
the appropriate Switch Request.
4) Press the "Apply" button.
The switching can be also performed by means of the hardware. The CC card has
two latches, at the top and at the bottom. They are used to extract/ insert the card on
the shelf and also to keep it fixed. There is an internal switch associated with the top
latch.
When the respective latch is pressed on the active the card it will initiate the
switchover. The reason for this is to detect that a card is going to be extracted and
make the changeover before it happens. This allows for shorter traffic interruptions.

78

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

1
Card status

2
3
4

Fig. 58 HOCC card protection: Software switching

Switch

Fig. 59 HOCC 1+1 card protection: Hardware switching

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

79

Protection Features

5.6

LOCC Card protection

LOCC Switch Card protection is self configuring whenever there are two or four
switch cards inserted on the hiT 7080 subracks.
To identify which switch card is currently active an operator can look at the ACT LED
on the card(s). This can be seen either on the card(s) or on the LCT program.
1) To look the actual state as well the bandwidth capacity configured into the 7080,
select Configuration CC 1+1 Protection LOCC Capacity Management
from the chassis main menu. This will display:

Current capacity of the LOCC


Current state of each card
From this menu as well is defined the bandwidth capacity for hiT 7080 will
have. To define what should be the total bandwidth, just select into the LOCC
capacity field the desire LO capacity.
2) Switching between the two cards can be performed by selecting Configuration
CC 1+1 Protection LOCC 1+1 Protection from the chassis main menu.
3) This will display:

Capacity of the LOCC


Last switch status
Switching status
Current state for the working card
Current state for the protection card
4) An operator can perform a "Manual Switch" between the two cards by selecting
the appropriate Switch Request.
TIP
LOCC1 are the Slot 5 and 6 (working slots), because the system see as one
card and LOCC2 are the Slots 7 and 8 (protection slots).
5) Press the "Apply" button.
The switching can be also performed by means of the hardware. The CC card has
two latches, one at the top and the other one at the bottom. They are used to extract/
insert the card on the shelf and also to keep it fixed.
When the respective latch is pressed on the active the card it will initiate the
switchover. The reason for this is to detect that a card is going to be extracted and
make the changeover before it happens. This allows for shorter traffic interruptions.

80

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Fig. 60 LOCC Capacity Management

3
4

Fig. 61 LOCC 1+ 1 Protection

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

81

Protection Features

5.7

System Controller Card Protection

SC 1 + 1 protection prevents SC functions from failing, including failure of software


tasks and MIB files, and guarantees at least one SC card is working in the normal
state and the system can provide continuous service.
To trigger the SC 1 + 1 protection switch, complete the following steps:
1) In the chassis main menu, select the Configuration SC 1+1 Protection menu
item. The SC 1+1 Protection window is opened.
2) The user can view the basic information of both SC cards.
3) If it is necessary to switch the SC card, the user can select the desired request
item from the Switch request drop-down list.
4) Click Apply or Ok to confirm the settings and close the window.
When the SC 1+1 switch is triggered, all the card with exception of the CC card will
turn into the fault state for several seconds, but is doesn't affect the traffic. After
several seconds, they will turn to the normal state.
TIP
There must be at least a six minutes interval between successive SC 1 + 1
switches to ensure system stability

82

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

3
2

1
4
Fig. 62 SC switching procedures

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

83

Protection Features

84

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Exercise

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

85

Protection Features

86

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Exercise 1
Title:
MSP 1+1 Configuration

Objectives:
Setup and check the MSP 1+1 protection

Pre-requisite:
Active NEs connected together via redundant lines

Task
Ask your instructor for the name of your team (e.g. student01), name and IP address
of the network element which will be used for the exercises (e.g. NE name: Leipzig,
NE IP address: 172.16.8.61, NE management IP address: 10.10.6.10/
255.255.255.240) and write it down in the list below.

I am working with the team:

student _ _

Name of the real NE: ____________________


NE IP address :

__ . __ . __ . __

MGMT IP address :

__ . __ . __ . __

MGMT Net Mask :

__ . __ . __ . __

Fig. 63 Team Assignment

Each team has to configure a CC and a MSP according to the details given in Fig. 64
and the tables below.
Common MSP 1+1 configuration parameters for all teams:

MSP Mode: 1+1


Port Type: STM-4
Wait To Restore: 60 seconds
Group Label: One+One
Switch Direction: Bidirectional
Operation Mode: Revertive
FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

87

Protection Features

Team specific parameters for Worker and Protection lines:


Team 1: NE Leipzig
Worker channel

Card

Port

Working Multiplex Section

Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>

P01 (STM-4)

Protection Multiplex Section

Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>

P01 (STM-4)

Team 2: NE Potsdam
Channel

Card

Port

Working Multiplex Section

Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>

P02 (STM-4)

Protection Multiplex Section

Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>

P02 (STM-4)

Working Multiplex Section

Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>

P01 (STM-4)

Protection Multiplex Section

Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>

P01 (STM-4)

Team 3: NE Landau
Channel

Card

Port

Working Multiplex Section

Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>

P02 (STM-4)

Protection Multiplex Section

Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>

P02 (STM-4)

Working Multiplex Section

Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>

P01 (STM-4)

Protection Multiplex Section

Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>

P03 (STM-4)

Team 4: NE Wuppertal
Worker channel

Card

Port

Working Multiplex Section

Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>

P02 (STM-4)

Protection Multiplex Section

Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>

P03 (STM-4)

Now, according with your team, proceed to make the following cross connections

88

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Team

Type

Capacity

Label

TPA

TPZ
Slot 16. Port # 1

Bidirectional

VC-12

One+One

LC1. Port #1

AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

VC-12

VC-12

One+One

One+One

Slot 16. Port # 2

Slot 16. Port # 1

AU-4 # 1

AU-4 # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 16.Port # 2

Slot 16. Port # 1

AU-4 # 1

AU-4 # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 16. Port # 2


4

Bidirectional

VC-12

One+One

AU-4 # 1

Slot 25. Port # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

89

Protection Features

1 + 1 MSP: MUX Plan


DDF

2 Mbps
Electrical

DDF

STM 4
STM 4
1 + 1 MSP

Slot Slot Slot Slot


LC13
16#5
#5 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7
#1#2
7080 Leipzig
Leipzig (L)
(L)
7080
Slot 3
172.16.8.61
172.16.8.61
#1
10.10.6.10
10.10.6.10
LC7

Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot


#8
17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 16 #5 16 C
C
7080 Potsdam
Potsdam (P)
(P)
Slot
7080
2
Slot 2
172.16.8.62
17 #8
172.16.8.62
#1
10.10.6.20
10.10.6.20
C3
Slot
C
Slot 2 Slot Slot Slot
#1
1
#2
17 #5 16 #1 17 #1

STM 16

C2
Slot
C
Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot #2
#1
1
16 #2 17 #2 #2 25 #5

Leipzig Extension Shelf


172.16.8.65
10.10.6.70

EXT Shelf

TEAM 2
STM 16

STM 16

STM 4

STM 4

TEAM 1
STM 4

C
C
1

Slot
16 C
#8
C
Slot
2
17 #8

STM 4

STM 4

LC 1
#1

Slot
CC1
C
C
Slot
2
CC2

1 + 1 MSP

STM 16

LC 1
#1

C
C
2
Slot
CC1
C
Slot
C
CC2
1

Slot Slot Slot Slot 2


Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 17 #5 #2
#2
#1
7080
7080 Wuppertal
Wuppertal (W)
(W) Slot 2
172.16.8.63
172.16.8.63
Slot
#1
10.10.6.50
10.10.6.50
16 #8

Slot Slot 2 Slot Slot


C
17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2
C
#1
7080 Landau
Landau (LD)
(LD)
1
7080
Slot 3
172.16.8.64
172.16.8.64
Slot
#1
10.10.6.40
C
10.10.6.40
16 #8
C
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot
2
17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 16 #5 17 #8

STM 16

Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot


17 #8 25 #5 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2

EXT Shelf

STM 4
Wuppertal Extension Shelf
172.16.8.67
10.10.6.100

TEAM 4

TEAM 3

STM 4
1 + 1 MSP
STM 4

DDF

Fig. 64 1 +1 MSP: Mux Plan

Query
1. Configure the MSP and the cross-connection as stated above.
2. Once your partner teams have finished the configuration settings, check if the
MSP protection is using the configured working lines. This is indicated by a
"Normal" switch status.
3. Once checked the working line is carrying the traffic, make sure that there is no
switch request pending on the MSP. With the help of the instructor check the
normal traffic is up and running on the measurement instruments.
4.

Ask your instructor to shutdown the laser in one of the worker line section and
verify if the protection line is selected. Verify also if the measurement instrument
still has normal traffic. If this is not the case, find out the reason.

5. Ask your instructor to enable the laser again on the working line. Is the traffic
switched back to the working line? If not, find out the reason.
6. When all the previous steps have been completed, please delete all the MSP
protection and cross connections.

90

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

FINISH.

Ive got it !

Fig. 65 End of exercise 1

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

91

Protection Features

Exercise 2
Title:
MSP 1:N Configuration

Objectives:
Setup and verify a MSP 1:N protection

Pre-requisite:
Active NEs connected together via redundant lines

Task
Ask your instructor for the name of your team (e.g. student01), name and IP address
of the network element which will be used for the exercises (e.g. NE name: Leipzig,
NE IP address: 172.16.8.61, NE management IP address: 10.10.6.10/
255.255.255.240) and write it down in the list below.

I am working with the team:

student _ _

Name of the real NE: ____________________


NE IP address :

__ . __ . __ . __

MGMT IP address :

__ . __ . __ . __

MGMT Net Mask :

__ . __ . __ . __

Fig. 66 Team Assignment

Each team has to configure a CC and a MSP according to the details given in Fig. 67
and in the tables below.
Common MSP 1:N configuration parameters for all teams:

MSP Mode: 1:N


Port Type: STM-4
Wait To Restore: 60 seconds.
Group Label: One2N

92

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

Team specific parameters Worker and Protection lines:


Team 1: NE Leipzig
Worker channel

Working Card

Working Port

Priority

Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>

P01 (STM-4)

High

Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>

P01 (STM-4)

Low

Protection Card

Protection Port

Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>

P03 (STM-4)

Team 2: Potsdam
Worker channel

Working Card

Working Port

Priority

Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>

P02 (STM-4)

High

Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>

P02 (STM-4)

Low

Protection Card

Protection Port

Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>

P03 (STM-4)

Team 3: Landau
Worker channel

Working Card

Working Port

Priority

Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>

P01 (STM-4)

High

Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>

P01 (STM-4)

Low

Protection Card

Protection Port

Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>

P03 (STM-4)

Team 4: Wuppertal
Worker channel

Working Card

Working Port

Priority

Slot 16 <8 x STM-4/1>

P02 (STM-4)

High

Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>

P02 (STM-4)

Low

Protection Card

Protection Port

Slot 17 <8 x STM-4/1>

P03 (STM-4)

According with your team, proceed now with the following cross connections:

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

93

Protection Features

Team

Type

Level

Name

TPA

TPZ
Slot 16. Port # 1

TH

LC1. Port # 1

AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1

Bidirectional

VC-12

TL

EXT

TH

Bidirectional

VC-12

TL

EXT

TH

Bidirectional

VC-12

TL

EXT

Slot 16. Port # 5

Slot17. Port # 1

AU-4 # 1

AU-4 # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 16. Port # 7

Slot17. Port # 3

AU-4 # 1

AU-4 # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 16. Port # 2

Slot 17. Port # 1

AU-4 # 1

AU - 4 # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 17. Port # 2

Slot 16. Port #1

AU-4 # 1

AU-4 # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 17. Port # 3

Slot 3. Port # 1

AU-4 # 1

AU-4 # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 1.1.1

Slot 17. Port # 2

Slot 16. Port # 1

AU-4 # 1

AU-4 # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 16. Port # 2

Slot 17. Port # 1

AU-4 # 1

AU-4 # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 2. Port # 1

Slot 17. Port # 3

AU-4 # 1

AU-4 # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 16. Port # 2


TH

AU-4 # 1

Slot 25. Port # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1
4

Bidirectional

VC-12

TL

EXT

94

Slot 17. Port # 2

Slot 24. Port # 1

AU-4 # 1

AU-4 # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 17. Port # 3

Slot 24. Port # 2

AU-4 # 1

AU-4 # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

STM-1
Optical

1:N MSP: MUX Plan


EXTRA

Leipzig Extension Shelf


172.16.8.65
10.10.6.70
Slot
CC1
C
C
Slot
2
CC2

LC 1
#1

C
C
1

W1 (H)

STM 4

W2 (L)
Slot
16 C
#8
C
Slot
2
17 #8

STM 4

Slot Slot Slot Slot


LC13
25#5
#1 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7
#1#2
7080 Leipzig
Leipzig (L)
(L)
7080
Slot 3
172.16.8.61
172.16.8.61
#1
10.10.6.10
10.10.6.10
LC7

Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot


#8
17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 16 #5 16 C
C
7080 Potsdam
Potsdam (P)
(P)
Slot
7080
2
Slot 2
172.16.8.62
17 #8
172.16.8.62
#1
10.10.6.20
10.10.6.20
C3
Slot
C
Slot 2 Slot Slot Slot
#1
1
#2
17 #5 16 #1 17 #1

STM 16

C2
Slot
C
Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot #2
#1
1
16 #2 17 #2 #2 17 #5

2 Mbps
Electrical

DDF

STM 4

EXT Shelf

TEAM 1
TEAM 2
STM 16

STM 4

STM 4

STM 16

STM 4

STM 4

STM-1
Electrical

STM 16

Set to Inward
loopback
Set to Inward
loopback

Slot Slot Slot Slot 2


Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 24 #2 #2
#2
#1
7080 Wuppertal
7080
Wuppertal (W)
(W) Slot 2
172.16.8.63
172.16.8.63
Slot24
#1
10.10.6.50
10.10.6.50
#1

Slot Slot 2 Slot Slot


C
17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2
C
#1
7080 Landau
Landau (LD)
(LD)
1
7080
Slot 3
172.16.8.64
172.16.8.64
Slot
#1
10.10.6.40
10.10.6.40
16C#8
C
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot
2
17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 16 #5 17 #8

STM 16

Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot


17 #8 25 #1 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2
W2 (L)

TEAM 4

STM 4

TEAM 3

STM 4

W1 (H)
EXTRA

EXT Shelf

STM 4

DDF

Fig. 67 1:N MSP: Mux Plan

Query
1) Configure and enable the MSP. Setup the cross-connection as stated above.
2) Once your partner teams have finished with the configuration, check if the MSP
protection is using the configured working lines. This is indicated by a "Normal"
switch status.
3) Make sure that there is no switch request pending on the MSP. With the help of
the instructor check that the normal traffic as well as the extra traffic is up and
running on the measurement instruments.

Traffic Flow

OK

NOT OK

Worker 1 (High Priority)


Worker 2 (Low Priority)
Extra Traffic

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

95

Protection Features

4) Ask your instructor to shutdown the laser on the worker line W2(L) between NE
"Leipzig" and the NE "Potsdam". Verify the traffic flows.
Traffic Flow

OK

NOT OK

Worker 1 (High Priority)


Worker 2 (Low Priority)
Extra Traffic
5) Now request to your instructor to shutdown the laser on the worker line W1(H)
between NE "Leipzig" and NE "Potsdam". Verify the traffic flows.
Traffic Flow

OK

NOT OK

Worker 1 (High Priority)


Worker 2 (Low Priority)
Extra Traffic
6) Ask your instructor to enable the laser again on the worker line W2(L) between
NE "Leipzig" and NE "Potsdam". Verify the traffic flows.
Traffic Flow

OK

NOT OK

Worker 1 (High Priority)


Worker 2 (Low Priority)
Extra Traffic

96

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

7) Finally, ask your instructor to enable the laser again on the worker line W1(H)
between NE "Leipzig" and NE "Potsdam" and check the traffic flows.
Traffic Flow

OK

NOT OK

Worker 1 (High Priority)


Worker 2 (Low Priority)
Extra Traffic
8) At the end, please delete the MSP and all cross connections created.

FINISH.

Ive got it !

Fig. 68 End of exercise 2

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

97

Protection Features

Exercise 3
Title:
Path Protection

Objectives:
Setup and Test a Path protection

Pre-requisite:
Active NEs connected together via alternate routes

Task
Ask your instructor for the name of your team (e.g. student01), name and IP address
of the network element which will be used for the exercises (e.g. NE name: Leipzig,
NE IP address: 172.16.8.61, NE management IP address: 10.10.6.10/
255.255.255.240) and write it down in the list below.

I am working with the team:

student _ _

Name of the real NE: ____________________


NE IP address :

__ . __ . __ . __

MGMT IP address :

__ . __ . __ . __

MGMT Net Mask :

__ . __ . __ . __

Fig. 69 Team Assignment

Team 1 and 4 has to configure a SNCP protection according to the details given in
Fig. 70.
Team 2 and 3 has to configure a SNCP protection according to the details given in
Fig. 71.

98

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

SNCP for Team 1 and 4 : MUX Plan


STM 4
Leipzig Extension Shelf
172.16.8.65
10.10.6.70
Slot
CC1
C
C
Slot
2
CC2

LC 1
#1

C
C
1

STM 4
STM 4
Slot
16 C
#8
C
Slot
2
17 #8

Slot Slot Slot Slot


LC13
25#5
#1 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7
#1#2
7080 Leipzig
Leipzig (L)
(L)
7080
Slot 3
172.16.8.61
172.16.8.61
#1
10.10.6.10
10.10.6.10
LC7

Slot
Slot Slot Slot Slot
#8
17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 25 #1 16 C
C
7080 Potsdam
Potsdam (P)
(P)
Slot
7080
2
Slot 2
172.16.8.62
17 #8
172.16.8.62
#1
10.10.6.20
10.10.6.20
C3
Slot
C
Slot 2 Slot Slot Slot
#1
1
#2
17 #5 16 #1 17 #1

STM 16

C2
Slot
C
Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot #2
#1
1
16 #2 17 #2 #2 17 #5

EXT Shelf

2 Mbps
Electrical

STM 16

STM 4

STM 4

STM 16

STM 4

STM 4

TEAM 1

STM 16

LC 1
#1

C
C
2
Slot
CC1
C
Slot
C
CC2
1

Slot Slot Slot Slot 2


Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 16 #5 #2
#2
#1
7080 Wuppertal
7080
Wuppertal (W)
(W) Slot 2
172.16.8.63
172.16.8.63
Slot
#1
10.10.6.50
10.10.6.50
16 #8

Slot Slot 2 Slot Slot


C
17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2
C
#1
7080
1
7080 Landau
Landau (LD)
(LD)
Slot 3
172.16.8.64
172.16.8.64
Slot
#1
10.10.6.40
10.10.6.40
16C#8
C
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot
2
17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 16 #5 17 #8

STM 16

Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot


17 #8 25 #1 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2

EXT Shelf

STM 4
Wuppertal Extension Shelf
172.16.8.67
10.10.6.100

TEAM 4

STM 4
STM 4

DDF

Fig. 70 SNCP Mux Plan: Team 1 and 4

Common SNCP configuration parameters:

Type: Bidirectional
Circuit Label: SNCP
Capacity: VC-12
Restore Mode: Revertive
Intrusive Mode: SNCP/N
Wait To Restore: 60 seconds
Hold Off Time: 0

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

99

Protection Features

According with your assigned team, please procedure to make the following cross
connections:
Team

Equipment Name

Leipzig

SNCP

1
Potsdam

Landau

SNCP

SNCP

4
Wuppertal

100

SNCP

Source TP

Working TP

Protection TP

(TPA)

(TPZ)

(TPZ')

Slot 2. Port # 2

Slot 3. Port # 1

AU-4 # 1

AU-4 # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

LC1. Port # 1
Slot 2. Port # 1

Slot 2. Port # 2

AU-4 # 1

AU-4 # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 2. Port # 2

Slot 3. Port # 1

AU-4 # 1

AU-4 # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 25. Port # 1

Slot 2. Port # 1

Slot 2. Port # 2

AU-4 # 1

AU-4 # 1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

SNCP for Team 2 and 3: MUX Plan


STM 4
Leipzig Extension Shelf
172.16.8.65
10.10.6.70
Slot
CC1
C
C
Slot
2
CC2

LC 1
#1

C
C
1

STM 4
STM 4
Slot
16 C
#8
C
Slot
2
17 #8

Slot Slot Slot Slot


LC13
25#5
#1 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7
#1#2
7080
7080 Leipzig
Leipzig (L)
(L)
Slot 3
172.16.8.61
172.16.8.61
#1
10.10.6.10
10.10.6.10
LC7

Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot


#8
17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 25 #1 16 C
C
7080
Potsdam (P)
(P)
Slot
7080 Potsdam
2
Slot 2
172.16.8.62
17 #8
172.16.8.62
#1
10.10.6.20
10.10.6.20
C3
Slot
C
Slot 2 Slot Slot Slot
#1
1
#2
17 #5 16 #1 17 #1

STM 16

C2
Slot
C
Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot #2
#1
1
16 #2 17 #2 #2 17 #5

EXT Shelf

STM 16

STM 4

STM 4

STM 16

STM 4

STM 4

TEAM 2

STM 16
2 Mbps
Electrical

LC 1
#1

C
C
2
Slot
CC1
C
Slot
C
CC2
1

Slot Slot Slot Slot 2


Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 16 #5 #2
#2
#1
7080 Wuppertal
7080
Wuppertal (W)
(W)
Slot 2
172.16.8.63
172.16.8.63
Slot
#1
10.10.6.50
10.10.6.50
16 #8

Slot Slot 2 Slot Slot


C
17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2
C
#1
7080 Landau
Landau (LD)
(LD)
1
7080
Slot 3
172.16.8.64
172.16.8.64
Slot
#1
10.10.6.40
10.10.6.40
16C#8
C
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot
2
17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 16 #5 17 #8

STM 16

Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot


17 #8 25 #1 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2

EXT Shelf

STM 4
Wuppertal Extension Shelf
172.16.8.67
10.10.6.100

TEAM 3

STM 4
STM 4

DDF

Fig. 71 SNCP Mux Plan: Team 2 and 3

Common SNCP configuration parameters:

Type: Bidirectional
Circuit Label: SNCP
Capacity: VC-12
Restore Mode: Revertive
Intrusive Mode: SNCP/N
Wait To Restore: 60 seconds
Hold Off Time: 0
According with your assigned team, please procedure to make the following cross
connections:

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

101

Protection Features

Team

Equipment Name

Leipzig

SNCP

2
Potsdam

Landau

SNCP

SNCP

3
Wuppertal

SNCP

Source TP

Working TP

Protection TP

(TPA)

(TPZ)

(TPZ')

Slot 2. Port # 1

Slot 3. Port # 1

AU-4 # 2

AU-4 # 2

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 25. Port # 1

Slot 3. Port # 1

Slot 2. Port # 1

AU-4 # 2

AU-4 # 2

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 3. Port # 1

Slot 2. Port # 1

AU-4 # 2

AU-4 # 2

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

LC1. Port # 1

Slot 2. Port # 1

Slot 3. Port # 1

AU-4 # 2

AU-4 # 2

TU-12 # 1.1.1

TU-12 # 1.1.1

Query
1) Ask the instructor to setup the measurement instrument, and verify there are no
errors detected for the test path
2) Check if the SNCP is using the worker path. If not, switchover the traffic to the
worker path, verify the traffic flow with the help of the measurement instruments.
Make sure the protection is in the normal status.
3) Ask your instructor to interrupt the traffic over the working path and verify on the
NE that the traffic switched to the protection path. Verify the traffic flow with the
help of the measurement instruments.
4) Repair the worker path and verify that the traffic switches back after the WTR
timer has expired.
5) Delete the protection path. Verify the traffic flow with the help of the measurement
instruments.
6) Once all the previous steps have been completed, delete the protection and
remaining cross connections.

102

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

FINISH.

Ive got it !

Fig. 72 End of exercise 3

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

103

Protection Features

Exercise 4
Title:
Card Protection

Objectives:
Setup and Test a card protection

Pre-requisite:
Active NEs connected together via alternate routes

Task
Ask your instructor for the name of your team (e.g. student01), name and IP address
of the network element which will be used for the exercises (e.g. NE name: Leipzig,
NE IP address: 172.16.8.61, NE management IP address: 10.10.6.10/
255.255.255.240) and write it down in the list below.

I am working with the team:

student _ _

Name of the real NE: ____________________


NE IP address :

__ . __ . __ . __

MGMT IP address :

__ . __ . __ . __

MGMT Net Mask :

__ . __ . __ . __

Fig. 73 Team Assignment

From this exercise will perform both STM-1 and E1 card protection. In a way to
create these protections, please follow the MUX diagram in Fig. 74.

104

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Protection Features

E1 + STM-1 Card Protection : MUX Plan


Set to Inward
loopback

STM 4
2 Mbps
Electrical

STM 4
STM 4

Slot
16 C
#8
C
Slot
2
17 #8

Slot Slot Slot Slot


LC13
25#5
#2 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7
#1#2
7080
7080 Leipzig
Leipzig (L)
(L)
Slot 3
172.16.8.61
172.16.8.61
#1
10.10.6.10
10.10.6.10
LC7

Slot
Slot
Slot Slot Slot
#8
17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 24 #1 16 C
C
7080
Slot
7080 Potsdam
Potsdam (P)
(P)
2
Slot 2
172.16.8.62
17
#8
172.16.8.62
#1
10.10.6.20
10.10.6.20
C
Slot 3
C
Slot 2 Slot Slot Slot
#1
1
#2
17 #5 16 #1 17 #1

STM 16

C2
Slot
C
Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot #2
#1
1
16 #2 17 #2 #2 24 #1

EXT Shelf

TEAM 2

STM 16

STM 4

STM 4

STM 16

STM 4

STM 4

TEAM 1

STM 16

TEAM 4

TEAM 3
Slot Slot Slot Slot 2
Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 24 #1 #2
#2
#1
7080 Wuppertal
7080
Wuppertal (W)
(W)
Slot 2
172.16.8.63
172.16.8.63
Slot
#1
10.10.6.50
10.10.6.50
16 #8

2 Mbps
Electrical

Slot Slot 2 Slot Slot


C
17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2
C
#1
7080
1
7080 Landau
Landau (LD)
(LD)
Slot 3
172.16.8.64
172.16.8.64
Slot
#1
10.10.6.40
10.10.6.40
16C#8
C
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot
2
17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 24 #1 17 #8

STM 16

Slot Slot
Slot Slot Slot
17 #8 25 #2 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2

EXT Shelf

STM 4

Set to Inward
loopback

STM 4
STM 4

Fig. 74 E1 + STM-1 card protection MUX Plan

Proceed with the following settings:

Team

NE

EPG Type

Working
Card

Protecting
card

WTR

Leipzig

1:N E1

Slot 25

Slot 26

30 (sec)

Potsdam

1:N STM-1 E

Slot 24

Slot 28

30 (sec)

Wuppertal

1:N E1

Slot 25

Slot 26

30 (sec)

Landau

1:N STM-1 E

Slot 24

Slot 28

30 (sec)

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

105

Protection Features

Create the following Cross connection


Team

NE

Type

Level

Name

TPA

TPZ
Slot 3. Port # 1

Leipzig

Bidirectional

VC-12

CP

Slot 25. Port # 2

AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 2. Port # 1
2

Potsdam

Bidirectional

VC-12

CP

AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 3. Port # 1

Landau

Bidirectional

VC-12

CP

AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1

Slot 24. Port # 1


TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 24. Port # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 2. Port # 1

Wuppertal Bidirectional

VC-12

CP

Slot 25. Port # 2

AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1

Query
1) Ask the instructor to setup the measurement instrument, and verify there are no
errors detected for the test path.
2) Check where the traffic is going in which E1 card and in which STM-1 E card.
3) Require to your instructor to plugged out the card in Slot 25 in Leipzig and
Wuppertal, or execute an internal switch request through the software. Check the
protection state status on both protections and the test analyzer if the traffic is still
running.
4) Repeat the same procedures now for the Slot 24 in Potsdam and Landau.
Once all the previous steps have been reached and fulfilled, delete the protection and
remaining cross connections.

106

FT52426EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

Maintenance

Contents
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
3
3.1

Alarm handling
Basic information
General definitions
Alarm displays
Changes on the Default Alarm Configuration
Basic Troubleshooting
SDH alarm scheme
Optical safety management
Reboot and shutdown
Test management
Basic fault clearance
Site Maintenance
General card replacement procedures

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

3
4
6
8
20
41
42
46
48
50
58
61
62

Maintenance

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

Alarm handling

Fig. 1

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

1.1

Basic information

Fault Management is concerned with the detection, localization, isolation and


reporting of failures on the transmission signals processed by the hiT 7080 and on
the hiT 7080 equipment itself.
The signal and equipment failures are differentiated in two failure classes:

transmission failures
equipment failures
In addition to these two failure categories the hiT 7080 supports external alarm
contacts (MDI, MDO), which can be used for signaling any kind external events.
Failures are reported via the management interface to the OS and may also lead to
alarm indications at the TNMS-C (card indications, NE indications).
A list of current alarms is kept for every NE and is updated according to changes
reported by the respective NE.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

hiT 7080 Alarms


TNMS

History Alarms
Active Alarms
Raised alarms

Fig. 2 SURPASS hiT7080 alarms

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Maintenance

1.2

General definitions

Alarm Severity
Depending on the significance of the alarm messages and the alarm severity
assigned to them, they trigger different reactions. A minor fault which, for example,
has the effect of degrading the transmission signal (increased bit error rate) usually
has no significant effect on operation; for this reason, it results in a low priority alarm
message (minor). In contrast, serious faults can cause an interruption of service
and therefore result in a high priority alarm message (major), which requires
immediate fault clearance.
There are four classes of alarm priorities:

Critical (red high-light): Critical alarm


Major (orange high-light): Major alarm
Minor (yellow high-light): Alarm of no great significance
Warning (blue high-light): Alarm acting as a warning
Alarm Types

Traffic related:
Communication alarms: The communication alarms originate at TPs (termination
Points).
Quality of Service Alarms: The QoS alarms originate from TPs with performance
measurements and thresholds cross notifications.

Equipment related:
Equipment alarms: The equipment alarms originate from specific cards.
Environmental alarms: Environmental alarms are external alarms.
Processing error alarms: The processing error alarms originate from Software.
Clear Status

Cleared: This status indicates the alarm is no longer active. The alarm will remain
in the LCT Active Alarm list until it is acknowledged. Once the alarm is
acknowledged is will show up on the LCT History Alarms list

Not Cleared: Indicates the alarm is still active on the Network element. Not
Cleared Alarms are shown on the LCT Active Alarms list

Cleared Manually: Indicates the current operator has cleared this alarm on this

LCT. Note this alarm will return to Not Cleared status when the operator logs out
and in again or performs alarm synchronization.

After having received an alarm-raised notification the LCT assumes that this alarm is
present until a corresponding alarm cleared notification is received
.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

Alarm Types:
Communications:

Associated with procedures and/or processes required to convey


information from one point to another

Quality of service:

Associated degradation in the quality of a service

Processing error:

Associated software or processing fault

Equipment:

Associated equipment fault

Environmental:

Associated condition relating to an enclosure in which the equipment


resides

Alarm event types :


Not Cleared:

Indicates the beginning of a certain alarm

Cleared:

Indicates the clearing of a previously reported alarm

Cleared Manually: Indicated Alarm is acknowledged.

Fig. 3 Alarm types and events

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Maintenance

1.3

Alarm displays

1.3.1

Input Power Monitoring

Input Power monitoring is performed by the SC card. Status LEDs at the power I/O
section indicate that the corresponding power supply is on. See Fig. 4.

1.3.2

Alarm LEDs on SI and SI-E card

On hiT 7080 the NE summary alarm indications are shown on the front panel of the
System Interface. Three LED's indicate the network element alarm conditions.
Label Color

Status

Description

CR

ON

One or more critical non communication alarms are


present.

Red

Flashing One or more critical communication alarms are present.


LED test (Note1).
SI card is initialization. (Note2)
OFF
MJ

Orange ON

No critical alarms are present, and system is in service.


There are one or more major alarms present.

Flashing LED test (Note1)


SI card is initialization. (Note2)
MN

Yellow

OFF

No major alarms.

ON

There are one or more minor alarms present.

Flashing LED test (Note1)


SI card is initialization. (Note2)
OFF

No Minor alarms. (Warning and Indeterminate alarms


wont turn the LED on)

Note1: After the LED test button is pushed, all LED's except all cards PWR LED and
FE interfaces small link LED as well as SC card CF LED will be flashing for 5 sec.
Note2: During the NE cold or warm reboot period, there are two steps.

First step: SI E card initialization; all three LED's are OFF


Second step: After that, all three LED's are flashing with 1 second frequency. Stop
flashing of those three LED's is regarded as the finish point of the rebooting.
Before whole system (all cards) isn't up, the alarm status reported by each card
will not be reflected by the Critical/Major/Minor LED's.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

Input Power Monitoring

WORKING

PROTECTING

RETURN/RED
-48V/BLUE

RETURN/ORANGE
-48V/BLACK

RETURN/RED
-48V/BLUE

Power(A)

Power(A)

RETURN/ORANGE
-48V/BLACK

Power(B)

Power Monitoring LEDs

Fig. 4 Input Power Monitoring

Label

Color

Status

Description

ON
Critical (CR)

Major (MJ)

RED

ORANGE

Minor (MI)

YELLOW

One or more critical non communication alarms are present


One or more critical communication alarms are present.
LED test (Note 1).
SI card is inizialitation process (Note2).

FLASHING
OFF

No Critical alarms are present and the system is in service

ON

There are one or more major alarms present


LED test (Note 1).
SI card is inizialitation process (Note2).

FLASHING
OFF

No major alarms

ON

There are one or minor alarms present

FLASHING

LED test (Note 1).


SI card is inizialitation process (Note2).

OF
PWR CR LED ACO
TEST

DEGUG

MJ

MN

FAULT

No minor alarms (Warning and Indeterminate alarms wont turn the LED on )

T3-1

SUP

T4-1
T3-2

MGT-1

ALM
T4-2

EXT-1

MGT-2

HCOC2
HCOC1

EXT-3

EXT-2

EXT-4

EOW

MDO1-4

MDI1-4

MDO5-8

MDI5-8

F1-1
F1-2

Fig. 5 Alarm LED's on SI-E Card

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

1.3.3

Common LED indications on modules

To assist in maintenance, there are some LEDs on the front of some of the modules.
Not all cards have all of the following LEDs. Refer to the table below indicating which
cards have which LEDs.
PWD LED: A Green "PWD" LED indicates the card is powered. "PWD" LED off
indicates that there is not Power available due to a broken power converter, external
power cable or connector.
FAULT LED: A red FAULT LED indicates one or more alarms are present or the
card is booting.
TIP
The "FAULT" LED will also be lit on a traffic card if a SFP is not inserted or there is
no signal received.
ACT LED: A green "ACT" LED shows the EPG state. When NE is rebooting, the
state of this LED will be kept. For HOCC cards, this LED will be on when there is only
one HOCC card because the EPG of HOCC always exists.
LINK LED: The green "Link" LED state on SDH interface is related to LOS. The Link
LED state on GE interface is related to link status. Warm reboot will not affect the
state of Link LED.

10

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

LEDs
Card

ACT

SC

PWR

FAULT

CF

LINK

CR

MJ

MN

SI

X
X

SI E

HOCC

LOCC

2 x STM-64

8 x STM-16

8 x STM-4/1

8 x STM-1e (W/P)

8 x STM-1e (I/O)

12 x E3/DS3 (W/P)

12 x E3/DS3 (I/O)

126 x E1 (W/P)

126 x E1 (I/O)

1 x 10GE/T

8 x GE/T

6 x GE + 4 x FEGE/A

2 x GE + 12 x FE/RPR

POA

BOA

Fig. 6 Common LED's indications on modules

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

11

Maintenance

1.3.4

Alarm display on LCT

Active Alarm List


A detailed listing of all alarms, recorded since the operating terminal began
monitoring alarms, can be found by selecting from "Chassis View" main menu:
Fault Active Alarms.
The list contains all alarms which are not acknowledged independently of its Cleared
Status. The possible cleared statuses are:

Cleared: alarm cleared event received for that alarm from NE. This event is time
stamped on the alarm details.

Not Cleared: no alarm cleared event received yet for that alarm from NE
Cleared Manually: alarm cleared manually by the operator. After synchronizing

the NE, or login out and in again, the alarm will show up once more in a new entry
as Not Cleared. The line with "Cleared Manually" status will remain in the list.

There, three time stamps are given per alarm:

alarm raise time


alarm clear time
time the alarm was acknowledged (the user that performed the command is also
recorded)

Alarm Detail Window


To have access to the detail of one alarm, please proceed with these steps:
1. Select an alarm from the alarm list. The background color will turn to grey
2. Click on the "Detail" button, a Description, Cause and Recommended Action for
that alarm is displayed.

12

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

Access to print the list


in several file formats
Help
topics

Alarm
filter

Get more details


about one alarm

Fig. 7 Active Alarm list

Fig. 8 Alarm Detail window

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

13

Maintenance

To acknowledge an alarm:
1. Select the alarm entry in the "Active Alarm" list.
2. With a click on the right mouse button open pop-up menu and select
"Acknowledge Alarm" from command list. The "Acknowledge Comments"
window will open.
3. Write optionally some comment about the alarm into the comment field.
4. Click the "OK" button to confirm.
TIP
When an alarm with status "Cleared" or "Cleared Manually" is acknowledged, it
automatically disappears from the LCT "Active Alarms" list and shows up in the
LCT "History Alarms" list. Alarms with status "Not Cleared" will remain in the
"Active Alarms" list even if they are acknowledged.

LCT History Alarms list


In the History Alarm list one can find alarms which are

cleared or
have been cleared manually and
are acknowledged
Only alarm entries in the LCT History Alarms list can be deleted.
To delete an alarm:
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Fault History Alarms. The "History
Alarm" window will open.
2. Select the alarm you want to delete from list.
3. With a click on the right mouse button open pop-up menu and select "Delete
Alarm" from command list. A "Confirmation" window will pop up.
4. Click the "Yes" button to confirm. The alarm will be removed from the alarm list.

14

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

2
1

3
4

Fig. 9 Alarm Acknowledgement

3
2

Fig. 10 History Alarms List

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

15

Maintenance

Filtered Alarm Display


If you want to display Active Alarms or History Alarms for a specific card or port:
1. Select the object (card or port) in the "Chassis View" window.
2. With a click on the right mouse button open pop-up menu and select "Active
Alarms" or "History Alarms" from command list. The corresponding alarm
window will pop up and will display the active/history alarms for the selected
object.
3. To remove the filter condition from the alarm list, press "Search". The "Alarm
Search" window will pop up.
4. Search parameters are set to defaults. Press "OK" in the "Alarm Search"
window. The filter condition will be removed and all active / history alarms on the
NE will be displayed.
Alarms filtered by severity and/or category
Alarms sorted on an alarm severity and/or category criteria can be obtained by
clicking over the number indicating the quantity of alarms at the lower section of the
GUI as shown in Fig. 12

16

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

1
4
2

Fig. 11 Filtered Alarm Display

Double
click

Fig. 12 Alarms filtered by severity and/or category

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

17

Maintenance

1.3.5

Event Information in LCT

Besides the Alarms lists, it could be important for the maintenance tasks to know
about the exact moment there were changes in the system status. The events logged
are:

System Level Events (access, reboot, MIB, etc)


Card Level Events (state, error report, etc)
Port Level Event (port state, SFP state, port operation mode)
Equipment Protection Events
Traffic Protection Events
Synchronization Events
DCN Events
Ethernet Events
The TNMS M LCT time stamps every event and logs it in a file. The Events listed in
the log file detail the time and date the event occurred, the event's name, type, and a
short description. The event about the communication between NE and LCT is
recorded in LCT rather than getting it from NE.
To open the Events list:
1. In the chassis Main Menu select Fault Events
The Events list windows opens
TIP
This is only an information window; there are not configuration options available

18

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

Fig. 13 Events List

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

19

Maintenance

1.4
1.4.1

Changes on the Default Alarm Configuration


Alarm Rule Switch Configuration

To control the RS LOF, TU LOM and TU LOP reporting:


1. From "Chassis View" main menu select:
Fault Alarm Rule Switch Configuration
2. Set the LOF Monitoring Switch parameter from drop-down list to:
"Enable" to set to non monitoring.
"Disable" to set to monitoring.
3. Click the "Apply or Ok" button to activate the changes.

20

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

RS LOF reporting controlled by Alarm Switch Configuration

When disable,
RS-LOF alarms
are reported!

Fig. 14 RS-LOF reporting controlled by Alarm Rule Switch Configuration

1
2

1
3

Fig. 15 Alarm Rule Switch Configuration

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

21

Maintenance

1.4.2

AIS and RDI alarms configuration

It is possible to enable or disable the AIS/RDI alarms for the complete network
element or for particular termination points. The default configuration is AIS and RDI
alarms disabled for the complete network element. This is done so in order to
minimize the amount of alarm entries in the Alarms lists in case of a failure, taking in
consideration that AIS/RDI alarms are "secondary" alarms. In the majority of the
cases it might be enough to see only the primary alarms to carry out the
troubleshooting. Changes made in this window have an immediate effect over the
alarm list
To see current settings in the AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration window:
1. In the main menu click over Fault AIS/RDI Alarms Configuration
2. Once the AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration window opens, press the
"Query" button to see the termination points and the current configuration
3. An "Information" box will show up asking to wait for a moment
4. After the termination points (TPs) are shown, select the TPs where the AIS/RDI
alarms should be enabled. This can be done for the complete network element,
for a complete card or for individual TPs (MS, AU-4). By default all the points are
disabled (checkpoints not selected). The activation can be done for a particular
TP, for a complete card or for the complete NE.
5. Click on "Apply or Ok" button to make the changes real.
6. At the first AIS alarm enabling, a confirmation dialog box will be presented
informing that the AIS alarm will be enabled for the element.
7. Click on "Yes" button.
8. Another "Information" box will show up asking to wait for a moment until the
changed data are uploaded.
9. The updated AIS/RDI Enabled Configuration window will be presented.
WARNING
Even when the secondary alarms (AIS/RDI) are disabled, they will not show up
as "Disable" in the Alarm Type List.

22

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

2
Fig. 16 AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration I

4
9

7
8

Fig. 17 AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration II

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

23

Maintenance

1.4.3

Alarm inhibit configuration

For those cards or ports which are currently not used, it is possible to mask their
alarms completely. This is done through the Alarm Inhibit Configuration window. The
changes made in this window have an immediate effect, that is, if a card/port with
active alarms is inhibited all the alarms go immediately to the Cleared status (green
background color in the Active Alarms list). If the card/port was in the inhibit state and
it is configured to Non-Inhibit, then if there were active alarms affecting that card/port,
they would go to the Not Cleared status.
WARNING
The default configuration after the commissioning procedure is the complete
network element alarms inhibited. The Active Alarm list will not show any
alarm.
In order to change the alarm inhibit configuration:
1. In the "Chassis View" main menu, select Fault Alarm Inhibit Configuration
2. The "Alarms Inhibit Configuration" window opens. There you can see the
settings for the complete NE, particular cards or ports. If the corresponding check
point is set, then the relevant alarms for that particular object are inhibited. The
plus sign shows the child objects for the parent object besides (e.g. the ports for
a particular card are the child objects and the card the parent).
WARNING
If the alarms are inhibited for a particular child object (e.g. port) the parent
object check point (e.g. card) will not show this condition. You have to click the
plus sign to find out if the alarms are inhibited there.
3. Set the check point for the card/port where the alarms should be inhibited/non
inhibited
4. Click the "OK" or "Apply" button to make the changes real
5. In the information dialog box that shows up, click the OK button to finish.

24

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

1
2

5
4

Fig. 18 Alarm Inhibit Configuration

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

25

Maintenance

1.4.4

Alarm type list management

The Alarm Severity for every alarm within each network element can be modified
based on the alarm type.
Also the reporting of alarms can be enabled and disabled based on the alarm type.
WARNING
Disabling any alarm will only apply to new alarms and not to current alarms. If
an active alarm is disabled, it will remain in the Active Alarm list, but if a new
failure leads to an alarm of the same type, this one will not be reported. The
same happens with Alarm Severity.
To open the "Alarm Type List Management" window in order to modify the severity
and the alarm reporting status:
1. In the "Chassis View" main menu select Fault Alarm Type List
Management
2. Selected a particular alarm (the background color becomes blue).
3. With a click on the right mouse button on the "User Defined Severity" column
open pop-up menu and select the alarm severity.
4. With a click on the right mouse button on the "Report Status" column enable or
disable alarm reporting for the selected alarm type.
5. To make the changes real and close this window, click the "OK or Apply"
button. An "Information" window will pop up.
6. Click the "Yes" button to confirm.

26

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

4
5
1

Fig. 19 Alarm Type List Management

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

27

Maintenance

1.4.5

Alarm Persistency Time Configuration

In particular failure scenarios, the alarm persistency is very short. Commonly these
alarms are known as intermittent alarms.
The intermittent alarms will fill the alarms logs (Active Alarms, History Alarms) in a
very short period of time.
To avoid the logs filling with intermittent alarms, the persistency time can be
configured in hiT 7080. The Alarm Detection Persistent Time represents the
minimum time the alarm has to be present before it is reported in the Alarms List (by
default the value is 2 seconds). The Alarm Clearing Persistent Time represents the
minimum time the alarm has to remain in the cleared status before being cleared in
the Alarms List (default value, 10 seconds).
In order to change the persistency times,
1. In the "Chassis View" main menu select Fault Alarm Persistent Time
Configuration
2. Change the "Alarm Detection Persistent Time" and "Alarm Clearing
Persistent Time" accordingly
3. Click the "Apply" button to finish. An "Information" window will pop up.
4. Click the "OK" button to confirm.

28

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

2
3

3
4

Fig. 20 Changing Alarm Persistent Time

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

29

Maintenance

1.4.6

Event Log Configuration

The operator can define the Event Log Policy. The Event Log policy is executed
when the number of the stored events in the event log file reaches the maximum.
To define the Event Log Policy:
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select: Fault Event Log Configuration
2. Select the size of stack for logs. The minimal size could be selected is 500 and
the maximal size could be selected is 5000.
Enter the event log storage policy from the drop-down list:
FIFO: if there are new incoming events, the newest events will be stored while the
oldest ones will be discarded.
rejectNewEvent: any new incoming event will be rejected.
3. Click the "Apply" button to finish. An "Information" window will pop up.
4. Click the "OK" button to confirm.

30

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

2
1

3
4

Fig. 21 Event Log Configuration

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

31

Maintenance

1.4.7

Alarm Out Configuration

On the front plate of the hiT 7080 SI-E card there are three LEDs intended to indicate
summarized alarm conditions. The red LED indicates critical alarms, the orange LED
indicates mayor alarms and the yellow one minor alarms. The warning severity is not
shown.
For rack alarm indications, the systems use the ALM connector on the SI-E card.
Through this connector the SI-E can drive subrack alarm information to an external
alarm card that summarizes the rack alarms. The external alarm card has an "urgent"
and a "non urgent" alarm indication.
The alarm LEDs on the SI-E and in the external alarm card can be affected pressing
the push buttons on the NEs (Suppress and Alarm Cut Off) or using LCT menu.
"Alarm out suppress" performs a temporarily alarm cutoff of this alarms. It has the
same effects as pressing the suppress button on the NE. If new alarms go to the
raised status, the LEDs are going to be lit again.
The other 3 field are related with the external alarm panel.
"Alarm Out Cuttoff" performs a permanently alarm cutoff for the alarms going to the
external alarm panel.
"Enable CR / MJ Alarm Out" and "Enable Minor Alarm Out" are also used in order
to enable or disable alarms on the external alarm panel.
In order to access the "Alarm Out Configuration" window:
1. From the "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration Alarm Out
Configuration
2. Select the desired action; e.g. "Alarm Out Suppress".
3. Click the "Apply" button to finish. An "Information" window will pop up.
4. Click the "OK" button to confirm.

32

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

1
3

Fig. 22 Alarm Out Configuration

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

33

Maintenance

1.4.8

MDI / MDO Configuration

SURPASS hiT 7080 provides two RJ 45 ports for eight MDI (Miscellaneous Discrete
Input) interfaces and two RJ 45 ports for eight MDO (Miscellaneous Discrete Output)
interfaces. These connectors are placed on the front plate of the SI E card.

MDI is used to read the status of external alarms.


MDO is used to drive external devices.
The specification for the electrical contacts can be found in the Technical Description
of the hiT 7080.
In order to access the "MDI / MDO Alarm Configuration" window:
1. From the "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration MDI/MDO Alarm
Configuration
2. Select the "MDI" tab to configure the inputs
3. For each MDI you can configure the following parameters:
Label: Enter free text to help identify different MDIs.
Status: Select from the drop-down list to enable or disable the MDI status.
4. Click the "Apply" button to make your changes permanent. An "Information"
window will pop up.
5. Click the "OK" button to confirm.
6. Select the "MDO" tab to configure the outputs
7. Select the MDO from the drop-down list and the corresponding alarms of this
MDO port will be displayed in the "Already Associated Alarm List" pane.
8. Select from the drop-down list to "Enable" or "Disable" the MDO status.
9. Click on the "arrow" buttons to move the selected alarms from the
"Unassociated Alarm List" pane to the "Already Associated Alarm List"
pane and vice versa.
10. Click the "Apply or Ok" button to make your changes permanent. An
"Information" window will pop up.
11. Click the "OK" button to confirm.

34

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

Fig. 23 Open MDI/MDO Configuration window

6
3
2

2
9

4
2

10
2

11

Fig. 24 MDI/MDO configuration

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

35

Maintenance

1.4.9

Port Monitoring Configuration

It is possible to change the port monitoring configuration for each SDH port in the hiT
7080 equipment.

Auto Mode: The default configuration for the ports is Auto Mode, it means, the

system will not monitor the port as long as there is no valid signal detected on RX.

Monitor Mode: From that point on, when a valid input signal is detected for the
first time, the port mode changes to Monitoring. This enables alarm reporting.

Non monitor Mode: Is it also possible to configure the port mode to Non
monitor. In that case the alarms will never be reported for that port.

TIP
The configuration changes are immediately applied in the "Active Alarms" list.
Changing the port mode for a particular port to Monitor/Non-monitor modifies
immediately the cleared status for the alarms affecting that port (considering the
persistency time).
In order to access the "SDH Port Property Configuration" window:
1. Right mouse click over the relevant SDH port.
2. In the pop-up menu select "SDH Port Configuration".
3. In the "Port Property Configuration" window the "Port Mode" can be changed.
4. Click the "Apply or Ok" button to make your change permanent.

36

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

5
4

Fig. 25 SDH port monitoring mode configuration

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

37

Maintenance

1.4.10

Termination point monitoring configuration

It is possible to change the termination point (TP) monitoring configuration for:

RS TTP on SDH ports, RSOH.


MS TTP on SDH ports, MSOH.
VC4 CTP (NIM: Non Intrusive Monitoring) when VC4 is not structured, read only
access to the POH.

WARNING
The default configuration for TP Alarm Mon on all the termination points (TP) is
"Non-Monitored", it means, the Active Alarm list will not show alarms related
with those TP.
In order to see alarms related to a particular TP, it is necessary configure the
parameter "TP Alarm Mon" to "Monitored". To access the point
1. From the "Chassis View" Main Menu, select Configuration TP
Configuration
2. In the "TP Configuration" window select the relevant card and port
3. Click the Query button to get the list of TPs for that card and port
4. Select the Termination Point where the change should be made (the background
color changes to blue)
5. Modify TP Alarm Mon, the options are Monitored / Non-monitored
6. Click the Apply button to make your changes permanent. An "Information"
window will pop up.
7. Click the "OK" button to confirm.

38

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

2
1

Fig. 26 Open TP Configuration window

5
RS TTP

VC4 TTP
M S TTP

VC12
TTP

Fig. 27 TP Configuration

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

39

Maintenance

40

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

Basic Troubleshooting
TxDeg
auLOP
SD
SSF
AIS

TxFail

TS_T3
FERF

MIS-SL

LOS
UNEQ

Fig. 28

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

41

Maintenance

2.1

SDH alarm scheme

Large numbers of alarm and error messages are an integral part of SDH networks. In
SDH, these are referred to as defects and anomalies, respectively. They are coupled
to network sections and the corresponding overhead information. The advantage of
this detailed information is illustrated as follows:
Complete failure of a circuit results, e.g. in a LOS alarm (loss of signal) in the
receiving network element. This alarm triggers a complete chain of subsequent
messages in the form of AIS (alarm indication signals). The transmitting side is
informed of the failure by the return of an RDI alarm (remote defect indication). The
alarm messages are transmitted in fixed bytes in the SOH or POH. For example, byte
G1 is used for the HP-RDI alarm.

42

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

STM-N Alarm Scheme


High Order Path
Multiplex Section
Regenerator
Section

Regenerator
Section
K2

MS
RDI
HP
RDI

AIS

MS-AIS

LOS/LOF

AIS

MS
RDI
HP
RDI

K2
MS BIP

BIP Err.

G1
MS
REI

B1

B2
HP
BIP

M1

HP
REI

B3

G1

SDH
Multiplexer

SDH
Regenerator

SDH
Multiplexer

Fig. 29 Sections in a SDH network

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

43

Maintenance

With the help of the overhead data bytes, we can send forward and backward from
the reporting network element certain alarm conditions. This information helps to
localize the fault as quickly as possible.
Using a process of prioritization, and elimination, we can determine where the fault is,
what is possibly causing it and what needs to be done to fix it.
The following diagram attempts to show the Alarms raised, their subsequent actions,
destinations in the forward and backward directions.
The following description should help to read the diagram:

(J0), (C2), (H4) etc are bytes to be found in the RSOH, MSOH, POH High and low
order.

The line shows the direction the Alarm is sent, with a description of the alarm
event for example Loss of Signal, or Loss of frame.

The following show all the alarms that cause the forwarding onwards or backwards
of the next alarm indication as required.

The alarm names indicate the alarms that all cause the subsequent alarm

indication and the "1" indicates the contents of the STM frame contains all "1"s in
the AU-4.

LOS/LOF

Detected and Raised


(Object, where the alarm is generated.)
Generation and Sent
Fig. 30 Symbol description

44

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

Fig. 31 SDH maintenance interactions

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

45

Maintenance

2.2

Optical safety management

All versions of optical interfaces include ALS circuits (Automatic Laser Shutdown),
which are activated whenever the optical carrier fails, in accordance with ITU-T
Recommendation G.958 and IEC standard 825 Appendix 2.
In the presence of a LOS (Loss-of-signal) alarm the Laser is automatically switched
OFF leaving the optical connection in ALS status. The laser can recover
automatically or can be manually triggered (manual restart). In case of automatic
recovery the system generates a trigger pulse every 90s 10 sec.
If the condition that generated the failure (LOS) overcomes, a valid signal is provided
on the RX interface, the connection is immediately recovered.
The specific equipment configuration allows the possibility to enable/disable the
automatic laser shutdown (enabled by default), according to the EM settings.
In order to change the ALS configuration:
1. Right mouse click on the selected SDH port.
2. Select "SDH Port Configuration" from pop-up menu.
3. Perform the required settings
4. Press the "Apply or Ok" button to make the changes permanent.
WARNING
Port Admin Mode "Disabled" will shut the laser down for the complete port.

Tx

Rx
LSOFF
LSOFF

Rx

Tx

Optical carrier break

Loss-off-signal (LOS) alarm

Loss-off-signal (LOS) alarm

Automatic Laser Shut-down (ALS)

Automatic Laser Shut-down (ALS)

Fig. 32 Automatic Laser Shutdown Mechanism

46

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

Port admin mode:


Enable Laser on
Disable Laser off

3
2

Laser restart:
Manual restart:short pulse
Manual test: long pulse

4
2

Fig. 33 Optical Safety management

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

47

Maintenance

2.3

Reboot and shutdown

2.3.1

Software initiated

By selecting from "Chassis View" main menu Configuration NE from the main
menu there are 3 choices to reboot or shutdown the network element. These are:

Warm Reboot. Warm reboot will perform a network element software reload. This

option is not traffic effecting. System warm reboot process takes up to 18 minutes.
It is suggested that no operations (such as card insertion or pull out, system power
on or power off) be performed during system reboot.

Cold Reboot. Cold will perform both a software reboot as well as a hardware

reboot. System cold rebooting (system initialization) takes up to 19 minutes to


complete. It is suggested that no other operations (such as card insertion or pullout, system power-on or power-off) be performed during the system initialization.
System cold reboot will cause traffic hit. The traffic hit time is about 2 3 minutes
when traffic cards are rebooted.

Shutdown NE. This will perform a software shutdown of the system controller

card. This option is designed if you wish to perform a controlled shutdown of the
network element prior to switching off the power. This is not traffic effecting but it
does stop all management communications (CLI, TNMS-CT LCT, TNMS C).

TIP
Messages will show up informing about the consequences for the selected command
and asking for confirmation.

2.3.2

Hardware Initiated

There is a push button on the front of the SC card. For security reasons a small
object such as a pencil is required to push the button. This will perform a warm
reboot of the network element. This reboot is not traffic effecting.

2.3.3

Card Cold / Warm Reboot

On all traffic cards there is an option to perform a cold/warm reboot.


Cold reboot will stop all hardware functions and will reload the software from the
system controller. Lasers will be shut down during Cold Reboot. Traffic running on
this card will be interrupted. The card reboot time is 2 3 minutes.
Warm reboot restarts the card SW. Lasers stay turned on. Traffic is not interrupted.
To access the Cold/Warm Reboot options for a card, right click over the card and
select "Cold Reboot Card" or "Warm Reboot Card" from the pop up menu.
TIP
Messages will show up for the selected command and asking for confirmation.

48

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

Software reebot.Not
traffic effecting
Hardware &Software
reebot. Traffic effecting

System controller shut down,


causes the NE go to offline
and will no be managed
anymore by TNMS. After shut
down, the power supply
should be disconnected

Fig. 34 Reboot Options

Software reebot only. Not


traffic effecting

Hardware & Software


reebot. Traffic effecting

Fig. 35 Cold/Warm Reboot a Traffic Card

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

49

Maintenance

2.4
2.4.1

Test management
Loopback test management

The SURPASS hiT 7080 support path and port loopbacks.


Path loopbacks where already discussed in the cross-connection chapter.
Nevertheless we can note here that as path loopbacks are created on the crossconnection matrix, they always send the input signal to the matrix towards the out
direction. They can be created on VC4, VC3 and VC12 level.
Port loopbacks are created on the interface card itself. The hiT 7080 supports "Port
Loopback" for SDH cards. Two types of loopback can be performed:

Inward Loopback
Outward Loopback
Inward Loopback
The Tx signal from the HOCC card will be looped on the SDH port and is sent back
towards the HOCC card.

Outward Loopback
The incoming line Rx signal will be looped back to the Tx port and transmitted onto
the line again.

50

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

Loopbacks for Test


Outward loopback
Cross Connection
Card

Phy. Port

STM-N

Inward loopback
Cross Connection
Card

Phy. Port

STM-N

Fig. 36 Loopbacks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

51

Maintenance

Configuring Port Loopbacks


To start a loopback test:
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select: Maintenance Loopback Test
Management.
2. In the "Loopback Test Management" window select the desired "Card" and
"Loopback Type" to filter the list of available ports.
3. Select the desired port where the loopback should be configured
4. Click the "Modify" button. The "Loopback Test Configuration" window will
open.
5. Select the types of loopback required, either "Inward Loopback" or "Outward
Loopback".
6. Click the "Begin" button. A "Confirmation" window will pop-up.
7. Click "Yes" to confirm.
8. The "Loopback State" information will change to reflect the modification. Press
the "Close" button to return to the "Loopback Test Management" window
when finished.
To stop a loopback test:
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select: Maintenance Loopback Test
Management.
2. In the "Loopback Test Management" window select the desired "Card" and
"Loopback Type" to filter the list of available ports.
3. Select the desired port where the loopback should be stopped
4. Click the "Modify" button. The "Loopback Test Configuration" window will
open.
5. Click the "Stop" button.
6. The "Loopback State" information will change to reflect the modification. Press
the "Close" button to return to the "Loopback Test Management" window
when finished.

WARNING
STM-N Port Loopbacks, loop back the whole STM frame (Payload and
Overheads) so care should be taken to make sure communications are
maintained.

52

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

1
2
1

3
4
5
1
6

7
8

Fig. 37 Start a Loopback

2
1

3
4

Fig. 38 Stop a Loopback

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

53

Maintenance

2.4.2

AIS / RDI Insertion Test Management

Configuration of Forced AIS/RDI


1. From the "Chassis View" main menu select: Maintenance AIS/RDI Insertion
Test Management.
2. In the "AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management" window select the desired "Card"
and "Port".
3. Click the "Query" button to filter.
4. An information window pops-up while the necessary information is retrieved from
the NE.
5. Select the Termination Point where the AIS/RDI is going to be inserted.
6. Click the "Set" button. The "AIS / RDI Insertion Test Set" window will open.
7. Click the radio button to select the "Insertion Test Type" required for your test.
Available options are:

Normal: No insertion test will be implemented.


In Forced-AIS: AIS will be inserted towards cross connection direction.
Out Forced-AIS: AIS will be inserted towards Tx port.
In Forced AIS and Out Forced AIS: AIS will be inserted both towards crossconnection direction and Tx port.

Out Forced RDI: RDI will be inserted towards Tx port.


8. Click the "OK" button to start the test.
9. An "Information" dialog box will confirm the action. Press the "OK" button to
proceed.
TIP
To stop a forced AIS / RDI select the "Normal" option in the "AIS / RDI Insertion
Test Set" window.

54

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

Fig. 39 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management

7
9
8

Fig. 40 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Set

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

55

Maintenance

2.4.3

LED Test

LED test is used to check if the LEDs of an NE are working correctly.


1. From the "Chassis View" main menu select: Maintenance LED Test to
launch the LED test dialog.
2. Click the "Test LED" button to start the test. If the LEDs on this NE work
properly, they will flash for a few seconds and then turn to their normal state. An
"Information" window will pop-up, when the test has finished.
3. Click the "OK" button to confirm.
NOTE
LCT user will not receive any feedback if LED test was successful or not. Visual
inspection of the LEDs directly at the NE has to be done.

56

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

Fig. 41 LED Test

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

57

Maintenance

2.5

Basic fault clearance

Basic options for alarm containment and alarm evaluation


Cables and Connectors

Check the electrical connectors to ensure that they are fully engaged and that
none of the pins is distorted.

Check the optical fibers and optical connectors in accordance with the instructions
given in Trouble Shooting Manual.

Check the cable layout (copper and optical fiber) in accordance with the wiring
diagram.

58

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

Basic Fault Clearance


Alarm

LEDs on the front panels of the


Cards ( also visible on LCT)

Detailed
identification of the
alarm on the LCT GUI

Referring to the
Recommended actions in:
Alarm detail window
Troubleshooting Manual
Fig. 42 Basic fault clearance

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

59

Maintenance

60

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

Maintenance

Site Maintenance

UX
X -M
X
MU
XL-

UX
T- M

X
- MU
XXL

12
U-5
CP
12
U-5
CP
R
DO

DT

X
-MU

X
MU
PT -

UX
SI-M

Fig. 43

FT52427EN02GLA1
2009 Nokia Siemens Networks

61

Maintenance

3.1

General card replacement procedures

Before replacing a module which is suspected of being defective, try to reactivate the
system by means of a hardware reset (e. g. pulling and re-inserting the module), but
do not do this if the red fault LED on the module is illuminated.
WARNING
When replacing modules, you must comply with the safety regulation and the
module replacement procedure, as described in Trouble Shooting Manual.
When replacing a module, it is essential to check and record the optical and the
electrical transmitting power, using an optical or electrical power meter respectively,
before the modules are returned to service.
The module setup procedure can only start once the module has been correctly
inserted into the slot, as far as the stop, and then locked. Modules can be removed
from or plugged into the slots while they are live.
Special Card replacement procedures apply for the SC card. They are d